Honeywell Satellite Radio St 3000 Users Manual .

ST 3000 to the manual 8a05c09e-2577-46e3-bdc8-63caffbb8472

2015-01-23

: Honeywell Honeywell-Honeywell-Satellite-Radio-St-3000-Users-Manual-261740 honeywell-honeywell-satellite-radio-st-3000-users-manual-261740 honeywell pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 316 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

User’s Manual

Honeywell Process Solutions

ST 3000 Smart Transmitter

Release 300 and Smart Field

Communicator Model STS103

User’s Manual

34-ST-25-14

6/08

ii ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

June 2008

While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate,

Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a

particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in

its written agreement with and for its customer.

In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential

damages. The information and specifications in this document are subject to

change without notice.

This document was prepared using Information Mapping® methodologies and

formatting principles.

TDC 3000, SFC, Smartline and ST 3000 are U.S. registered trademarks of

Honeywell Inc.

Information Mapping is a trademark of Information Mapping Inc.

Honeywell Process Solutions

512 Virginia Drive

Fort Washington, PA 19034

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual iii

About This Publication

This manual is intended as a detailed “how to” reference for installing, piping, wiring, configuring,

starting up, operating, maintaining, calibrating, and servicing Honeywell’s family of Release 300

Series 100 and Series 900 ST 3000® Smart Transmitters. It is based on using a model STS103

Smart Field Communicator (SFC®) as the operator interface for the ST 3000 transmitter. Be aware

that data in this manual overlaps information in the ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Installation Guide

and the Smart Field Communicator Model STS103 Operating Guide to minimize cross reference.

While this manual provides detailed procedures to assist first time users, it also includes keystroke

summaries for most procedures as a quick reference for experienced users.

If you will be digitally integrating the ST 3000 transmitter with our TotalPlant® Solution (TPS)

system, you will need to supplement this information with data in the PM/APM Smartline®

Transmitter Integration Manual which is supplied with the TDC 3000®X bookset. TPS is the

evolution of TDC 3000X.

This manual does not apply for non Release 300 Series 100, Series 600, Series 100e and non

Release 300 Series 900 transmitter models. If you have a non Release 300 Series 100 or Series

600 ST 3000 Smart Transmitter, refer to the Installation Guide 34-ST-33-28 and User’s Manual

34-ST-25-09 supplied with the transmitter for information. If you have a non Release 300 Series

900 or Series 100e Smart Transmitter, refer to the Installation Guide 34-ST-33-31 and User’s

Manual 34-ST-25-11 supplied with the transmitter for information.

Patent Notice

This product is covered by one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 4,520,488; 4,567,466;

4,494,183; 4,502,335; 4,592,002; 4,553,104; 4,541,282; 4,806,905; 4,797,669; 4,735,090;

4,768,382; 4,787,250; 4,888,992; 5,811,690; 5,875,150; 5,765,436; 4,734,873; 6,041,659 and

other patents pending.

iv ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

References

Publication

Title

Publication

Number

Binder

Title

Binder

Number

Smart Field Communicator

Model STS103

Operating Guide

34-ST-11-14

ST 3000 Smart Transmitter

Series 100 and Series 900

Release 300

Installation Guide

34-ST-33-39

For R400 and later:

PM/APM Smartline Transmitter

Integration Manual

PM12-410 Implementation/

PM/APM Optional Devices

TDC 2045

Symbol Definitions

This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product

Manual for additional information. This symbol appears next to required

information in the manual.

This WARNING symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product

Manual for additional information. This symbol appears next to required

information in the manual.

WARNING: risk of electrical shock. This symbol warns the user of a potential

shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4

Vpeak, or 60 VDC may be accessible.

ATTENTION, Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) hazards. Observe precautions for

handling electrostatic sensitive devices

Protective Earth (PE) terminal. Provided for connection of the protective earth

(green or green/yellow) supply system conductor.

Earth Ground. Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be

bonded to Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national

and local electrical code requirements.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual v

Table of Contents

References.................................................................................................................................................. iv

Technical Assistance.................................................................................................................................xiii

SECTION 1 —OVERVIEW - FIRST TIME USERS ONLY.................................................1

1.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................1

1.2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters .............................................................................................................2

1.3 Smart Field Communicator................................................................................................................8

1.4 Transmitter/SFC Order....................................................................................................................11

1.5 Local Smart Meter Options..............................................................................................................13

SECTION 2 —QUICK START REFERENCE.................................................................. 15

2.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................15

2.2 Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On-Line Quickly ................................................................................16

SECTION 3 —PREINSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS .............................................. 17

3.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................17

3.2 CE Conformity (Europe) Notice.......................................................................................................18

3.3 Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter .........................................................................................19

3.4 Considerations for SFC ...................................................................................................................22

3.5 Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option .................................................................................24

SECTION 4 —INSTALLATION....................................................................................... 25

4.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................25

4.2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter........................................................................................................26

4.3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter.............................................................................................................38

4.4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter.............................................................................................................43

SECTION 5 —GETTING STARTED ...............................................................................49

5.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................49

5.2 Establishing Communications .........................................................................................................50

5.3 Making Initial Checks.......................................................................................................................54

5.4 Changing Mode of Operation ..........................................................................................................57

vi ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

Table of Contents

SECTION 6 —CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................59

6.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 59

6.2 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 60

6.3 Entering a Tag Number................................................................................................................... 71

6.4 Selecting Output Form .................................................................................................................... 73

6.5 Adjusting Damping Time................................................................................................................. 76

6.6 Selecting Unit of Measurement....................................................................................................... 78

6.7 Setting Range Values Using SFC................................................................................................... 80

6.8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments ............................................................................ 84

6.9 Selecting Output Signal Mode (DE Mode Only) ............................................................................. 91

6.10 Selecting Message Format (DE Mode Only) .................................................................................. 94

6.11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC .............................................................................................. 96

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons ............................................................................... 103

6.13 Disconnecting SFC ....................................................................................................................... 122

SECTION 7 —STARTUP...............................................................................................123

7.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 123

7.2 Startup Tasks ................................................................................................................................ 124

7.3 Running Analog Output Check ..................................................................................................... 125

7.4 Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter....................................................................................... 128

7.5 Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter................................................................................ 131

7.6 Liquid Level Measurement - Vented Tank .................................................................................... 133

7.7 Liquid Level Measurement - Pressurized Tank ............................................................................ 136

7.8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter....................................................... 140

7.9 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter ........................................ 144

7.10 Pressure Measurement with AP Transmitter ................................................................................ 145

7.11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals............................................ 147

SECTION 8 —OPERATION ..........................................................................................151

8.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 151

8.2 Accessing Operation Data ............................................................................................................ 152

8.3 Changing Default Failsafe Direction ............................................................................................. 155

8.4 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area ................................................................................................. 157

8.5 Saving and Restoring a Database ................................................................................................ 159

8.6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display.......................................................................................... 163

SECTION 9 —MAINTENANCE .....................................................................................169

9.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 169

9.2 Preventive Maintenance................................................................................................................ 170

9.3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms............................................................................... 171

9.4 Replacing PWA............................................................................................................................. 175

9.5 Replacing Meter Body................................................................................................................... 178

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual vii

Table of Contents

SECTION 10 —CALIBRATION..................................................................................... 183

10.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................183

10.2 Overview........................................................................................................................................184

10.3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal ..................................................................................................185

10.4 Calibrating Range with SFC ..........................................................................................................189

10.5 Resetting Calibration .....................................................................................................................192

SECTION 11 —TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................... 195

11.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................195

11.2 Overview........................................................................................................................................196

11.3 Clearing the “#” Symbol From SFC Display ..................................................................................197

11.4 Diagnostic Messages ....................................................................................................................199

11.5 Running Status Check...................................................................................................................202

11.6 Interpreting Messages...................................................................................................................203

11.7 Checking SFC Display and Keyboard...........................................................................................207

SECTION 12 —PARTS LIST ........................................................................................ 209

12.1 Replacement Parts........................................................................................................................209

SECTION 13 —REFERENCE DRAWINGS .................................................................. 231

13.1 Wiring Diagrams ............................................................................................................................231

APPENDIX A – TABLE III OPTIONS IN MODEL NUMBER......................................... 233

A.1 Table III Options Reference...........................................................................................................233

APPENDIX B – FREEZE PROTECTION OF TRANSMITTERS ................................... 237

B.1 Possible Solutions/Methods ..........................................................................................................237

APPENDIX C – CONFIGURATION RECORD SHEET ................................................. 251

APPENDIX D – HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS REFERENCE......................................... 253

D.1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations ................................................................253

D.2 International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classification of Hazardous Locations ............259

D.3 Enclosure Ratings .........................................................................................................................263

INDEX............................................................................................................................ 266

viii ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

Figures

Figure 1 Typical ST 3000 Differential Pressure Transmitter................................................................................2

Figure 2 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Analog Mode of Operation............................................3

Figure 3 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Digital DE Mode of Operation. .....................................4

Figure 4 Typical SFC Communication Interface..................................................................................................8

Figure 5 Typical ST 3000 Transmitter and SFC Order Components. ................................................................11

Figure 6 ST 3000 with Local Smart Meter Option.............................................................................................14

Figure 7 Typical Mounting Area Considerations Prior to Installation ...............................................................19

Figure 8 Typical Bracket Mounted and Flange Mounted Installations...............................................................26

Figure 9 Leveling a Model STA122 or 922 Absolute Pressure Transmitter. .....................................................30

Figure 10 Typical Flange Mounted Transmitter Installation ................................................................................33

Figure 11 Typical Flush Mounted Transmitter Installation ..................................................................................34

Figure 12 Typical Pipe and Flange Mounted Installations ...................................................................................35

Figure 13 Typical Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Installation. ..................................................................37

Figure 14 Typical 3-Valve Manifold and Blow-Down Piping Arrangement. ......................................................38

Figure 15 Typical Piping Arrangement for ½” NPT Process Connection............................................................39

Figure 16 Operating Range for ST 3000 Transmitters. ........................................................................................43

Figure 17 ST 3000 Transmitter Terminal Block...................................................................................................44

Figure 18 Ground Connection for Lightning Protection.......................................................................................46

Figure 19 Typical SFC Connections.....................................................................................................................50

Figure 20 Write Protect Jumper Location and Selections.....................................................................................55

Figure 21 Display With All Indicators Lit............................................................................................................56

Figure 22 Keystroke Summary for Changing Mode of Operation. ......................................................................58

Figure 23 Summary of Configuration Process......................................................................................................60

Figure 24 SFC and ST 3000 Transmitter Memories.............................................................................................61

Figure 25 Flowchart — ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration.................................................................66

Figure 26 Keystroke Summary for Entering Tag Number....................................................................................72

Figure 27 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Output Conformity........................................................................74

Figure 28 Square Root Dropout Points.................................................................................................................75

Figure 29 Keystroke Summary for Adjusting Damping Time..............................................................................77

Figure 30 Keystroke Summary for Keying in LRV and URV..............................................................................81

Figure 31 Keystroke Summary for Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures. ...............................................83

Figure 32 Typical Setup for Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments.............................90

Figure 33 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication.................................................93

Figure 34 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Message Format. ...........................................................................95

Figure 35 Keystroke Summary for Configuring Local Smart Meter..................................................................102

Figure 36 Button Pushing Summary for Selecting Engineering Units. ..............................................................120

Figure 37 Button Pushing Summary for Setting Lower and Upper Display Limits...........................................121

Figure 38 Typical SFC and Meter Connections for Constant-Current Source Mode.........................................127

Figure 39 Typical Piping Arrangement for Flow Measurement with DP Type Transmitter..............................128

Figure 40 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with DP Type Transmitter.........................131

Figure 41 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with

DP Type Transmitter and Vented Tank..............................................................................................133

Figure 42 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with

DP Type Transmitter and Pressurized Tank.......................................................................................136

Figure 43 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with GP Type Transmitter.........................140

Figure 44 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with GP TypeTransmitter...................140

Figure 45 Typical Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter..............................144

Figure 46 Typical Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter.......................144

Figure 47 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with AP Type Transmitter.........................145

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual ix

Figures

Figure 48 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with

DP Type Transmitter with Remote Seals ...........................................................................................147

Figure 49 Location of Failsafe Direction Jumper on PWA................................................................................156

Figure 50 Summary of Save and Restore Database Function.............................................................................159

Figure 51 Display With All Indicators Lit..........................................................................................................163

Figure 52 Typical Calibration Hookup...............................................................................................................191

Figure 53 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference. ..........................................................................210

Figure 54 ST 3000 Transmitter Mounting Bracket Parts Reference. .................................................................211

Figure 55 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Electronics/Meter End. ..........................................................212

Figure 56 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Terminal Block End...............................................................212

Figure 57 Series 100 and Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models STD924 & STD930 C, D, G,

H, K, and L and STD974 ...................................................................................................................214

Figure 58 Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models Models STD924 & STD930 A, B, E, F, and J.....................217

Figure 59 Series 100 GP and AP Meter Bodies and Series 900 AP Meter Body...............................................219

Figure 60 Series 900 Dual-Head GP Meter Bodies............................................................................................221

Figure 61 Series 100 and Series 900 LGP Meter Body......................................................................................222

Figure 62 Series 900 Flush Mount Meter Body. ................................................................................................223

Figure 63 Series 100 and Series 900 Flange Mounted Meter Body. ..................................................................224

Figure 64 High Temperature Meter Body. .........................................................................................................226

Figure 65 SFC Smart Field Communicator and Accessories. ............................................................................228

Figure B-1 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid With Specific Gravity Heavier Than Process Fluid...............238

Figure B-2 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid with Specific Gravity Lighter Than Process Fluid.................239

Figure B-3 Piping Installation for Gas Flow. .......................................................................................................240

Figure B-4 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seals.....................241

Figure B-5 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seal.............................242

Figure B-6 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and

Impulse Piping with Electric Heating and Control.............................................................................243

Figure B-7 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and

Impulse Piping with Electric Heating Control. ..................................................................................244

Figure B-8 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating...247

Figure B-9 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating.........248

x ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

Tables

Table 1 ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family..................................................................................................6

Table 2 SFC Model Differences........................................................................................................................9

Table 3 Local Smart Meter Available Options................................................................................................13

Table 4 Start-up Tasks Reference....................................................................................................................16

Table 5 Operating Temperature Limits (Transmitters with Silicone Fill Fluids)............................................20

Table 6 Transmitter Overpressure Ratings......................................................................................................21

Table 7 Installing and Charging SFC Battery Pack.........................................................................................22

Table 8 Local Smart Meter Specifications. .....................................................................................................24

Table 9 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket......................................................................................27

Table 10 Zero Corrects Procedure for STD110.................................................................................................32

Table 11 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter.................................................................................36

Table 12 Suggested Transmitter Location for Given Process ...........................................................................39

Table 13 Process Connections...........................................................................................................................40

Table 14 Flange Description .............................................................................................................................41

Table 15 Installing Flange Adapter ...................................................................................................................42

Table 16 Wiring the Transmitter .......................................................................................................................45

Table 17 Starting Communications with Transmitter........................................................................................51

Table 18 Confirming Mode of Operation and Identifying Software Versions..................................................54

Table 19 Changing Mode of Operation.............................................................................................................57

Table 20 Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters............................................................63

Table 21 Entering Tag Number.........................................................................................................................71

Table 22 Selecting Output Conformity .............................................................................................................73

Table 23 Adjusting Damping Time...................................................................................................................76

Table 24 Pre-Programmed Engineering Units for Selection .............................................................................78

Table 25 Keying in LRV and URV...................................................................................................................80

Table 26 Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures......................................................................................82

Table 27 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments .......................................................84

Table 28 Selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication......................................................................................91

Table 29 Selecting Message Format..................................................................................................................94

Table 30 Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC.............................................................97

Table 31 Smart Meter Pushbutton Description ...............................................................................................103

Table 32 Smart Meter Engineering Units Code ..............................................................................................105

Table 33 Selecting Engineering Units.............................................................................................................106

Table 34 Smart Meter Restrictions for Setting Display Values.......................................................................109

Table 35 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display..................................................................110

Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display....................................................................114

Table 37 Startup Procedure Reference............................................................................................................124

Table 38 Using Transmitter in Constant-Current Source Mode......................................................................125

Table 39 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement With SFC .......................................................128

Table 40 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC..................................................131

Table 41 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank..................................134

Table 42 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank ...........................137

Table 43 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement With SFC........................141

Table 44 Starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC..................................................145

Table 45 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement with SFC.............148

Table 46 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access........................................................................152

Table 47 Cutting Failsafe Direction Jumper....................................................................................................156

Table 48 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area ....................................................................................................157

Table 49 Saving and Restoring a Database .....................................................................................................160

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual xi

Tables

Table 50 Description of Display Indicators Shown in Figure 51....................................................................163

Table 51 Summary of Typical Local Smart Meter Indications. ......................................................................165

Table 52 Possible Smart Meter Error Codes...................................................................................................166

Table 53 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms ..................................................................................171

Table 54 Process Head Bolt Torque Ratings...................................................................................................174

Table 55 Replacing PWA................................................................................................................................175

Table 56 Replacing Meter Body Only.............................................................................................................178

Table 57 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode ............................................................185

Table 58 Calibrating Measurement Range With SFC.....................................................................................189

Table 59 Resetting Calibration Data With SFC ..............................................................................................193

Table 60 Clearing the # Symbol from the SFC Display..................................................................................197

Table 61 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Non-Critical Failures...........................................................199

Table 62 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Critical Failures...................................................................200

Table 63 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors ........................................................200

Table 64 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Invalid Key Entry Errors.....................................................201

Table 65 Summary of Interrupt Messages For SFC Display...........................................................................201

Table 66 Running a Status Check With SFC ..................................................................................................202

Table 67 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table.........................................................................................203

Table 68 Running SFC Display and Keyboard Test .......................................................................................207

Table 69 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference. ........................................................................211

Table 70 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figures 55 and 56......................................................................213

Table 71 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 57...................................................................................215

Table 72 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 58...................................................................................218

Table 73 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 59...................................................................................219

Table 74 Replacement GP and AP Process Head Part Numbers for Narrow Profile Meter Body..................220

Table 75 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 60...................................................................................221

Table 76 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 61...................................................................................222

Table 77 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 62...................................................................................223

Table 78 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 63...................................................................................225

Table 79 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 64...................................................................................226

Table 80 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 65...................................................................................229

Table 81 Summary of Recommended Spare Parts..........................................................................................230

Table B-1 Temperature Range of Freeze Protection Systems...........................................................................246

Table B-2 Steam Pressure Versus Steam Temperature Values.........................................................................250

Table D-1 Factory Mutual (FM) Entity Parameters ..........................................................................................257

Table D-2 CSA Entity Parameters.....................................................................................................................258

Table D-3 CENELEC / LCIE Certification.......................................................................................................261

Table D-4 Standards Australia (LOSC) Certification........................................................................................262

Table D-5 Zone 2 (Europe) Declaration of Conformity....................................................................................262

Table D-6 NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and Comparable IEC Enclosure Classification..........................264

xii ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

Acronyms

AP.......................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure

APM .......................................................................................................Advanced Process Manager

AWG .............................................................................................................. American Wire Gauge

DE .................................................................................... Digital Enhanced Communications Mode

DP...................................................................................................................... Differential Pressure

EMI....................................................................................................... Electromagnetic Interference

GP.............................................................................................................................. Gauge Pressure

HP.................................................................................................................................High Pressure

HP.............................................................................................High Pressure Side (DP Transmitter)

inH2O ........................................................................................................................Inches of Water

LGP ...............................................................................................................In-Line Gauge Pressure

LP ..................................................................................................................................Low Pressure

LP ............................................................................................. Low Pressure Side (DP Transmitter)

LRV.................................................................................................................... Lower Range Value

mA................................................................................................................................. Milliamperes

mmHg............................................................................................................Millimeters of Mercury

NPT .................................................................................................................. National Pipe Thread

PCB .................................................................................................................. Printed Circuit Board

PM.............................................................................................................................Process Manger

PROM......................................................................................... Programmable Read Only Memory

PSI................................................................................................................ Pounds per Square Inch

PSIA ..............................................................................................Pounds per Square Inch Absolute

RFI.......................................................................................................Radio Frequency Interference

SFC..........................................................................................................Smart Field Communicator

TPS.....................................................................................................................TotalPlant Solution

URL..................................................................................................................... Upper Range Limit

URV ....................................................................................................................Upper Range Value

Vdc .....................................................................................................................Volts Direct Current

XMTR ..............................................................................................................................Transmitter

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual xiii

Technical Assistance

If you encounter a problem with your ST 3000 Smart Transmitter, check to see how your

transmitter is currently configured to verify that all selections are consistent with your application.

If the problem persists, you can reach Honeywell’s Solution Support Center for technical support

by telephone during normal business hours. An engineer will discuss your problem with you.

Please have your complete model number, serial number, and software revision number on hand

for reference. You can find the model and serial numbers on the transmitter nameplates. You can

also view the software version number using the SFC or SCT 3000 software application.

By Telephone Honeywell Solution Support Center Phone:

1-800-423-9883 (U.S. only)

Outside the U.S. call: 1-602-313-6510

Additional Help You may also seek additional help by contacting the Honeywell

distributor who supplied your ST 3000 transmitter.

By E-mail You can also e-mail your technical questions or comments about this

product to:

Honeywell Solution Support Center e-mail: ace@honeywell.com

Problem Resolution If it is determined that a hardware problem exists, a replacement

transmitter or part will be shipped with instructions for returning the

defective unit. Please do not return your transmitter without

authorization from Honeywell’s Solution Support Center or until the

replacement has been received.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 1

Section 1 —Overview - First Time Users Only

1.1 Introduction

Section contents This section includes these topics:

Section Topic See Page

1.1 Introduction ....................................................................................1

1.2 ST 3000 Transmitters.....................................................................2

1.3 Smart Field Communicator.............................................................8

1.4 Transmitter/SFC Order.................................................................11

1.5 Local Smart Meter Options...........................................................13

About this section This section is intended for users who have never worked with our

ST 3000 Smart Transmitter and its companion operator interface device

the hand-held Smart Field Communicator (SFC®) before. It provides

some general information to acquaint you with the ST 3000 transmitter

and the SFC.

ATTENTION Honeywell also offers the SCT 3000 Smartline Configuration Toolkit

that runs on a variety of Personal Computer (PC) platforms using MS-

DOS 5.0 or higher and Windows 3.1 or higher. It is a bundled Microsoft

Windows software and PC-interface hardware solution that allows

quick, error-free configuration of Honeywell Smartline field

instruments. Some SCT 3000 features include:

• Preconfigured templates that simplify configuration and allow rapid

development of configuration databases.

• Context-sensitive help and an on-line user manual.

• Extensive menus and prompts that minimize the need for prior

training or experience.

• The ability to load previously configured databases at time of

installation.

• Automatic verification of device identification and database

configuration menus and prompts for bench set up and calibration.

• The ability to save unlimited transmitter databases on the PC.

SCT 3000 Release 3.12.2 or greater is compatible with our latest Series

100 and 900, Release 300, ST 3000 transmitters. Please contact your

Honeywell representative for more information.

2 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

1.2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters

About the transmitter The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter comes in a variety of models for

measurement applications involving one of these basic types of

pressure:

• Differential Pressure

• Gauge Pressure

• Absolute Pressure

The transmitter measures the process pressure and transmits an output

signal proportional to the measured variable over a 4 to 20 milliampere,

two-wire loop. Its major components are an electronics housing and a

meter body as shown in Figure 1 for a typical differential pressure

model transmitter.

Figure 1 Typical ST 3000 Differential Pressure Transmitter.

Electronics

Housing

Meter Body

The ST 3000 can transmit its output in either an analog 4 to 20

milliampere format or a digital DE protocol format for direct digital

communications with our TPS system, Allen-Bradley PLCs and other

control systems.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 3

1.2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters, Continued

About the transmitter,

continued Besides the process variable (PV) output, the transmitter also provides

its meter body temperature as a secondary variable which is only

available as a read-only parameter through the SFC when the transmitter

is in its analog mode. See Figure 2.

Figure 2 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Analog Mode of Operation.

A/D

DP or PP

Sensor

Temperature

Sensor

Static Pressure

Sensor

Meter Body Electronics Housing

Pressure

Factory

Characterization

Data

Modular Electronics Terminal Block

Proportional 4 to

20 mA PV output.

(Digital signal

imposed during

SFC

communications)

D/A

PROM

Multiplexer

Microprocessor

Digital I/O

When the transmitter is in its DE mode, the process variable is available

for monitoring and control purposes; and the meter body temperature is

also available as a secondary variable for monitoring purposes only.

See Figure 3.

Continued on next page

4 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

1.2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters, Continued

Figure 3 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Digital DE Mode of Operation.

A/D

DP or PP

Sensor

Temperature

Sensor

Static Pressure

Sensor

Meter Body Electronics Housing

Pressure

Factory

Characterization

Data

Modular Electronics Terminal Block

Digital signal

broadcasts PV

in floating point

format over

20 mA loop.

Digital I/O

PROM

Multiplexer

Microprocessor

Series and model

number data Honeywell’s line of ST 3000 Smart Transmitters includes these two

series designations:

• Series 100

• Series 900

Each series includes several models to meet various process pressure

measurement and interface requirements. Each transmitter comes with a

nameplate located on the top of the electronics housing that lists its given

“model number”. The model number format consists of a Key Number

with several Table selections as shown below.

Key Number

Meter Body

Flange Assembly

Options

Factory Identification

Table I Table II Table III Table IV

Basic Type

STD1 20 E1H 00000 S 1CBXXXX

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 5

1.2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters, Continued

Series and model

number data,

continued

You can quickly identify what series and basic type of transmitter you

have from the third and fourth digits in the key number. The letter in the

third digit represents one of these basic transmitter types:

A = Absolute Pressure

D = Differential Pressure

F = Flange Mounted

G = Gauge Pressure

R = Remote Seals

The number in the fourth digit matches the first digit in the transmitter

Series. Thus, a “1” means the transmitter is a Series 100 and a “9” is a

Series 900.

For a complete breakdown of the Table selections in your model

number, please refer to the appropriate Specification and Model

Selection Guide that is provided as a separate document. However, a

description of the available Table III options is given in Appendix A of

this manual for handy reference.

ATTENTION Previous models of the ST 3000 transmitter with designations of Series

100, Series 100e, Series 600, and Series 900 have been supplied at

various times since the ST 3000 was introduced in 1983. While all these

transmitters are functionally alike, there are differences in housing and

electronics design. This manual only applies for Release 300, Series 100

transmitters with software version 3.0 or greater and Release 300, Series

900 transmitters with software version b.0 or greater. See the procedure

on page 50 to use the SFC to check your transmitter’s software version.

Release 300 transmitters can be identified by the “R300” designation on

the nameplate.

Transmitter

adjustments Except for optional zero and span adjustments, the ST 3000 has no

physical adjustments. You need an SFC to make any adjustments in an

ST 3000 transmitter. Alternately, certain adjustments can be made

through the Universal Station if the transmitter is digitally integrated

with a Honeywell TPS system; or through a PC running Honeywell

SCT 3000 software.

ST 3000 Transmitters

presently available Table 1 illustrates the present ST 3000 pressure transmitter family.

Continued on next page

6 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

1.2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters, Continued

Table 1 ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family.

Transmitter Type Series 100 Model Series 900 Model

Differential

Pressure

STD1xx

STD9xx

Differential Pressure

with Flange on One

Side

STF1xx

STF9xx

Dual-Head Gauge

Pressure Not Available

STG9xx

In-Line Gauge and

Absolute Pressure

STG1xL

STA1xL

STG9xL

STA9xL

Gauge and Absolute

Pressure

STG1xx

STA1xx

STG9xx

STA9xx

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 7

1.2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters, Continued

Table 1 ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family, continued.

Transmitter Type Series 100 Model Series 900 Model

Flange-Mount

Liquid Level

STF1xx

STF9xx

Differential Pressure

with Remote

Diaphragm Seals

STR1xx

STR9xx

Flush Mount

Not Available

STG93P

High Temperature

STG14T

STF14T

Not Available

8 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

1.3 Smart Field Communicator

About SFC

communications The portable, battery-powered SFC serves as the common communication

interface device for Honeywell’s family of Smartline Transmitters. It

communicates with a transmitter through serial digital signals over the 4

to 20 milliampere line used to power the transmitter. A request/response

format is the basis for the communication operation. The transmitter’s

microprocessor receives a communication signal from the SFC, identifies

the request, and sends a response message.

Figure 4 shows a simplified view of the communication interface provided

by an SFC.

Figure 4 Typical SFC Communication Interface.

SFC

Response

STR3001

4 to 20 mA line

Request

ST 3000

Power

Supply and

Receiver

Purpose of SFC The SFC allows you to adjust transmitter values, or diagnose potential

problems from a remote location such as the control room. You can use

the SFC to:

• Configure: Define and enter the transmitter’s operating parameters

including

– range values,

– output conformity,

– damping time,

– tag number (ID), and more

• Monitor: Read the input pressure to the transmitter in

engineering units and the transmitter’s output in

percent.

• Display: Retrieve and display data from the transmitter or SFC

memory.

• Change Mode

of Operation: Tell transmitter to operate in either its analog (4-20

mA) mode or its digital enhanced (DE) mode.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 9

1.3 Smart Field Communicator, Continued

Purpose of SFC,

continued • Check Current

Output: Use the transmitter to supply the output current

desired for verifying analog loop operation, troubleshooting,

or calibrating other components in the analog loop.

• Troubleshoot: Check status of transmitter operation and display

diagnostic messages to identify transmitter,

communication, or operator error problems.

SFC model

differences As Honeywell’s family of Smartline Transmitters has evolved, the SFC

has been changed to meet new model and functionality requirements.

Besides different software versions, some major differences exist

between these four SFC model designations.

• STS100

• STS101

• STS102

• STS103

Table 2 summarizes the differences between the four SFC models for

reference.

Table 2 SFC Model Differences

If SFC

model is. . . Then it is compatible

with. . . And additional functions

include . . .

STS100 Analog only ST 3000 smart

pressure transmitters Not applicable

STS101 Analog only ST 3000 smart

pressure transmitters, if

SFC software version is less

than 5.0.

Analog and Digital (DE)

mode ST 3000 pressure

transmitters and STT 3000

temperature transmitters, if

SFC software version is 5.0

or greater.

Corrects Reset, Failsafe Direction

and Sensor Temperature

indication.

Changing the mode from analog

to digital or digital to analog,

configuration parameters for STT

3000 and scratch pad

configuration area for ST 3000.

Continued on next page

10 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

1.3 Smart Field Communicator, Continued

SFC model

differences, continued

Table 2 SFC Model Differences, continued

If SFC

model is. . . Then it is compatible

with. . . And additional functions

include . . .

STS102 Analog and Digital (DE)

mode ST 3000 pressure

transmitters, STT 3000

temperature transmitters,

and MagneW 3000

electromagnetic flowmeters.

Changing the mode from analog

to digital or digital to analog.

Configuration parameters for

Magnew 3000 as well as scratch

pad configuration area.

STS103 Same as STS102 plus new

multivariable transmitters -

SCM 3000 Smart Coriolis

Flowmeter and SGC 3000

Smart Gas Chromatograph.

SMV 3000 Smart

Multivariable Transmitters, if

SFC software version is 4.2

or greater.

SMV 3000 with superheated

steam algorithm and

thermocouple input, if SFC

software version is 4.4 or

greater.

Release 300 Series 100 and

900 ST 3000 pressure

transmitters, if SFC software

version is 5.0 or greater.

Two-line, 16-character per line

display. Made “SAVE” and

“RESTORE” functions part of

configuration menu instead of

dedicated keys. Configuration

parameters for SCM 3000 and

SGC 3000.

Configuration parameters for

SMV 3000

SMV 3000 configuration

parameters for superheated steam

algorithm and thermocouple

inputs.

Local Smart Meter configuration

parameters.

ATTENTION The keystroke actions and prompt displays referenced in this manual are

for the SFC model STS103. While the SFC model STS103 does have a

two-line instead of a one-line display, many of the basic keystrokes and

configuration parameter prompts for ST 3000 pressure transmitters are

identical to those in the model STS102.

If you will be using a model STS102 SFC, you must refer to the SFC

Smart Field Communicator Operating Guide 34-ST-11-10 for keystroke

details. But, be aware that transmitter functions will be limited to only

those that are supported by the Model STS102 SFC.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 11

1.4 Transmitter/SFC Order

Order components Figure 5 shows the components that would be shipped and received for

a typical ST 3000 transmitter and SFC order.

Figure 5 Typical ST 3000 Transmitter and SFC Order Components.

ST 3000

Installation

Guide

Mounting Bracket (Optional)

ST 3000

 Series 100 ST 3000 Differential pressure transmitter with optional mounting bracket

 Smart Field Communicator with optional battery charger

Ordered

Shipped Received

ST 3000

User'sManual Quick

Reference

Guide

Leads

Battery

Pack

Pocket

Card

Battery

Charger

(optional)

SFC SFC

Operating

Guide

Shipped

separately,

if ordered

Continued on next page

12 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

1.4 Transmitter/SFC Order, Continued

About documentation Various documents are available for reference describing how to install,

configure and operate the ST 3000 transmitter:

• ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Installation Guide Using SFC Model

STS103 34-ST-33-39: One copy is shipped with every transmitter.

This document provides information for checking, installing, and

wiring the ST 3000 transmitter for operation.

• ST 3000 Smart Transmitter and SFC Smart Field Communicator

Model STS 103 User’s Manual 34-ST-25-14: One or more copies are

sent to the address designated on the order when specified. This

document provides detailed information for installing, wiring,

configuring, starting up, operating, maintaining, and servicing the ST

3000 transmitter. This is the main reference manual for the ST 3000

transmitter and it overlaps some data in the previously listed

Installation Guide 34-ST-33-39 and in the following Operating Guide

34-ST-11-14 to minimize cross reference.

• ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Quick Reference Guide 34-ST-09-06:

Shipped with User’s Manual. This document provides abbreviated

versions of procedures for installing, wiring, configuring, calibrating

and troubleshooting the ST 3000 transmitter for quick reference.

• Smart Field Communicator Model STS103 Pocket Card 34-ST-11-15:

One card is shipped with every SFC. This card provides quick

reference of keystroke actions for selected transmitter interface tasks.

• Smart Field Communicator Model STS103 Operating Guide 34-ST-

11-14: One copy is shipped with every SFC. This document provides

detailed SFC information and keystroke actions for interfacing with

these Honeywell Smartline Transmitters.

– ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter (Non Release 300 models)

– STT 3000 Smart Temperature Transmitter

– MagneW 3000 Smart Electromagnetic Flowmeter

– SMV 3000 Smart Multivariable Transmitter

• Smartline Configuration Toolkit SCT 3000 Installation and Start-up

Guide 34-ST-10-08: One copy is shipped when the SCT 3000

software application is ordered.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 13

1.5 Local Smart Meter Options

Option availability Depending upon your transmitter model, it can be equipped with one of

the available Local Smart Meter and/or Zero and Span Adjust options as

shown in Table 3.

Table 3 Local Smart Meter Available Options

Option Description Available with Transmitter Series

100 900

Local Smart Meter only

1000

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

Yes

Local Smart Meter with Zero and Span Adjustments

%1000

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

SPAN

ZERO

Yes *

Yes

Local Zero and Span Adjustments only

SPAN

ZERO

Yes *

Yes

* Except draft range, model STD110

Continued on next page

14 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

1.5 Local Smart Meter Options, Continued

About the options Each Local Smart Meter and/or Zero and Span Adjust option comes as a

separate assembly mounted on the transmitter’s Printed Wiring

Assembly (PWA) mounting bracket. The meter option assembly

includes a cable and plug assembly for mating with a connector on the

transmitter’s PWA. A meter end-cap which includes a window is

supplied on the electronics side of the transmitter’s housing so you can

view the meter display with the end cap installed. See Figure 6.

Figure 6 ST 3000 with Local Smart Meter Option.

Electronics

Housing Local Smart

Meter Option

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 15

Section 2 —Quick Start Reference

2.1 Introduction

Section Contents This section includes these topics:

Section Topic See Page

2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................15

2.2 Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On-Line Quickly .............................16

About this section This section assumes that the ST 3000 transmitter has been installed and

wired correctly, and is ready to be put into operation. It also assumes

that you are somewhat familiar with using the SFC and that the

transmitter has been configured correctly for your application. If the

transmitter has not been installed and wired, you are not familiar with

SFC operation, and/or you do not know if the transmitter is configured

correctly, please read the other sections of this manual before starting up

your transmitter.

This section provides a list of typical start-up tasks and tells you where

you can find detailed information about performing the task.

16 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

2.2 Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On-Line Quickly

Quick start-up tasks Table 4 lists common start-up tasks for an ST 3000 transmitter using an

SFC and gives an appropriate section in this manual to reference for

more information about how to do the task. The start-up tasks are listed

in the order they are commonly completed.

Table 4 Start-up Tasks Reference

Task Description Reference Section

1 Put analog loop into manual

mode. Appropriate vendor documentation

for controller or recorder used as a

receiver in analog loop with

ST 3000 transmitter.

2 Connect SFC to transmitter and

establish communications. 5.2

3 Check or set tag ID. 6.3

4 Identify transmitter’s mode of

operation. 5.3

5 Change mode of operation, if

required. 5.4

6 Check/set output form

(Linear/Square Root). 6.4

7 Check/set damping time. 6.5

8 Check/set Lower Range Value

and Upper Range Value. 6.7 (See 6.8 for local zero and

span adjustments)

9 Run optional output check for

analog loop. 7.3

10 Check zero input and set, if

required. 7.4 - See Step 9 in Table 39.

7.8 - See Step 9 in Table 43.

11 Check transmitter status. 8.2

12 Setup local Smart Meter, if

applicable. 6.11 or 6.12

13 Write data in scratch pad

memory, if desired. 8.4

14 Store all changes in the

transmitter's non-volatile

memory by pressing [SHIFT] and

[ENTER].

6.13

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 17

Section 3 —Preinstallation Considerations

3.1 Introduction

Section Contents This section includes these topics:

Section Topic See Page

3.1 Introduction ..................................................................................17

3.2 CE Conformity (Europe) Notice....................................................18

3.3 Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter ......................................19

3.4 Considerations for SFC................................................................22

3.5 Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option ..............................24

About this section This section reviews things you should take into consideration before

you install the transmitter and start using the SFC. Of course, if you are

replacing an existing ST 3000 transmitter and you did not order a new

SFC; you can skip this section.

18 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

3.2 CE Conformity (Europe) Notice

About conformity and

special conditions This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of

89/336/EEC, the EMC Directive. Conformity of this product with any

other “CE Mark” Directive(s) shall not be assumed.

Deviation from the installation conditions specified in this manual, and

the following special conditions, may invalidate this product’s

conformity with the EMC Directive.

• You must use shielded, twisted-pair cable such as Belden 9318 for all

signal/power wiring.

• You must connect the shield to ground at the power supply side of the

wiring only and leave it insulated at the transmitter side.

ATTENTION ATTENTION

The emission limits of EN 50081-2 are designed to provide reasonable

protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated

in an industrial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential

area may cause harmful interference. This equipment generates, uses,

and can radiate radio frequency energy and may cause interference to

radio and television reception when the equipment is used closer than 30

meters (98 feet) to the antenna(e). In special cases, when highly

susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity, the user may have to

employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the

electromagnetic emissions of this equipment.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 19

3.3 Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter

Evaluate conditions The ST 3000 transmitter is designed to operate in common indoor

industrial environments as well as outdoors. To assure optimum

performance, evaluate these conditions at the mounting area relative to

published transmitter specifications and accepted installation practices

for electronic pressure transmitters.

• Environmental Conditions

– Ambient Temperature

– Relative Humidity

• Potential Noise Sources

– Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)

– Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)

• Vibration Sources

– Pumps

– Motorized Valves

– Valve Cavitation

• Process Characteristics

– Temperature

– Maximum Pressure Rating

Figure 7 illustrates typical mounting area considerations to make before

installing a transmitter.

Figure 7 Typical Mounting Area Considerations Prior to Installation

Ambient

Temperature

Relative

Humidity

Large Fan Motors

(EMI)

Transceivers

(RFI)

Pump

(vibration)

Meter Body

Temperature

Lightning

(EMI)

21003

Continued on next page

20 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

3.3 Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Temperature limits Table 5 lists the operating temperature limits for the various types of

transmitters with silicone fill fluids. See transmitter specifications for

temperature limits of ST 3000 transmitters with alternative fill fluids.

Table 5 Operating Temperature Limits (Transmitters with Silicone Fill Fluids)

Transmitter Type and Model Ambient Temperature Process Interface Temperature

°C °F °C °F

Draft Range STD110 -40 to 70 -40 to 158 -40 to 70 -40 to 158

Differential Pressure STD125

STD120, STD130, STD170

STD904, STD924,

STD930, STD974

-40 to 85

-40 to 93

-40 to 85

-40 to 185

-40 to 200

-40 to 185

-40 to 85

-40 to 125

-40 to 185

-40 to 257

Gauge Pressure

STG140, STG170, STG180,

STG14L, STG17L, STG18L

STG14T

STG93P

STG944, STG974

STG90L, STG94L,

STG97L, STG98L

-40 to 93

-15 to 65

-40 to 85

-40 to 200

5 to 149

-40 to 185

-40 to 125

-40 to 150 †

-15 to 95 ††

-40 to 125

-40 to 110

-40 to 257

-40 to 302 †

5 to 203 ††

-40 to 257

-40 to 230

Absolute PressureSTA122/12L -40 to 93 -40 to 200 See Specification Sheet

STA140/14L -40 to 93 -40 to 200 -40 to 80 -40 to 176

STA922/92L -40 to 85 -40 to 185 See Specification Sheet

STA940/94L -40 to 85 -40 to 185 -40 to 80 -40 to 176

Flange Mounted

STF128, STF132, STF924,

STF932

Pseudo-Flanged Head

STF12F, STF13F, STF92F,

STF93F

STF14F

Gauge Pressure Flange Mount

STF14T

-40 to 93

-40 to 85

-40 to 93

-40 to 200

-40 to 185

-40 to 200

-40 to 175

-40 to 93

-40 to 85

-40 to 150 †

-40 to 350

-40 to 200

-40 to 185

-40 to 302 †

Remote Diaphragm Seals

STR12D, STR13D, STR14G,

STR17G, STR14A

See Specification Sheet

STR93D, STR94G -40 to 85 -40 to 185 See Specification Sheet

† Process temperatures above 125 °C (257 °F) require a reduction in the maximum ambient temperature as follows:

Process Temperature Ambient Temperature Limit

150 °C (302 °F) 50 °C (122 °F)

140 °C (284 °F) 60 °C (140 °F)

125 °C (257 °F) 85 °C (185 °F)

†† Process temperatures above 65 °C (149 °F) require a 1:1 reduction in maximum ambient temperature.

NOTE: For transmitters with local meter option see Table 8.

NOTE: Transmitters with other fill fluids (CTFE, Neobee, Etc.) have different Operating Temperature Limits. For

more specific information, refer to the appropriate Specification and Model Selection Guide or transmitter nameplate

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 21

3.3 Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Pressure ratings Table 6 lists maximum working pressure for a given transmitter Upper

Range Limit (URL).

The maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) is the pressure

used for the approval body safety calculations.

Table 6 Transmitter Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) Ratings

Transmitter Type Upper Range Limit

(URL) MAWP

Draft Range 10 inches H2O (25

mbar)

50 psi (3.5 bar)

Differential Pressure 400 inches H2O (1 bar) 3000 psi (210 bar)

100 psi (7 bar) 3000 psi (210 bar)

3000 psi (210 bar) 3000 psi (210 bar)

Gauge Pressure 100 psi (7 bar) 100 psi (7 bar)

300 psi (21 bar) 300 psi (21 bar)

500 psi (35 bar) 500 psi (35 bar)

3000 psi (210 bar) 3000 psi (210 bar)

6000 psi (415 bar) 6000 psi (415 bar)

10000 psi (690 bar) 10000 psi (690 bar)

400 inches H2O (1 bar)

Flange Mount

100 psi (7 bar)

Per selected flange

and material

(ANSI/ASME 150#,

300#, DN PN40)

400 inches H2O (1 bar)

Remote Seal

100 psi (7 bar)

Lesser MAWP of

either Remote Seal

selected or transmitter

pressure rating

Absolute Pressure 780 mmHg Absolute

(1 bar) 780 mmHg Absolute

(1 bar)

500 psia (35 bar) 500 psia (35 bar)

Note: Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) may vary with materials of construction and process

temperature. For more specific information, refer to the appropriate Specification and Model Selection

Guide or transmitter nameplate

NOTE: To convert bar values to kilopascals (kPa), multiply by 100.

For example, 3.5 bar equals 350 kPa.

22 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

3.4 Considerations for SFC

Install SFC battery

pack If the SFC battery pack was removed for shipping and/or storage, you

will have to install the battery pack and charge the batteries before you

can operate the SFC.

The procedure in Table 7 outlines the steps for the battery pack.

Table 7 Installing and Charging SFC Battery Pack

Step Action

1 Turn SFC face down on working surface. Use metric hex wrench

(2.5 mm) to remove screws in battery compartment cover and

remove cover.

2 Insert battery pack in compartment and connect plug in compartment

to pin on battery back

Example - Battery pack installation.

Battery Pack Hex Screws

21004

3 Replace cover and tighten hex screws

4 Connect lead from battery charger to recessed connector on left side

of SFC.

WARNING The SFC battery charger is not intrinsically safe.

Always recharge the SFC battery pack in a nonhazardous location.

The SFC itself is an intrinsically safe device.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 23

3.4 Considerations for SFC, Continued

Install SFC battery

pack, continued

Table 7 Installing and Charging SFC Battery Pack, continued

Step Action

5 Plug battery charger into any standard 120 Vac outlet or universal-

European 240 Vac outlet as applicable for charger power rating. If

240 Vac charger is supplied with stripped leads instead of universal-

European plug, lead identification for 240 Vac charger is as follows.

Lead Color… Function…

Blue Neutral

Brown Hot

Green/Yellow Ground

ATTENTION It takes up to 16 hours to fully recharge the battery

pack and you can use the SFC continuously for up to 24 hours

before the battery pack needs recharging.

Temperature Limits The ambient operating temperature limits for the SFC are –10 to 50°C

(14 to 122°F) with relative humidity in the range of 10 to 90% RH.

Usage guidelines • For transmitters operating in the Analog Mode, be sure to put an

analog control loop into its manual mode before initiating SFC

communications with the transmitter. Also, be sure any switches that

may trip alarms or interlocks associated with the analog loop are

secured or turned OFF. Communication superimposes digital signals

on the loop wiring that could affect the analog control signal.

• Be sure the power supply voltage does not exceed 45Vdc.

The ST 3000 transmitter and SFC were designed to operate with

voltages below 45Vdc.

• Be sure there is at least 250 ohms of resistance between the SFC and

the power supply for proper communications.

24 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

3.5 Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option

Reference

specifications Table 8 lists pertinent Smart Meter specifications for reference.

Table 8 Local Smart Meter Specifications.

Operating Conditions —————

Parameter Rated Extreme, Transportation and

Storage

Ambient Temperature °F

°C

–40 to 176

–40 to 80

–58 to 194

–50 to 90

Relative Humidity %RH 10 to 90 0 to 100

Design ———————————

Accuracy No error. Reproduces transmitter signal exactly within its resolution.

Display Resolution Bargraph

Digital Readout

±3% of reading

±0.005 for ±19.99 reading range,

±0.05 for ±199.9 reading range,

±0.5 for ±1999 reading range,

±5 for ±19990 reading range,

±50 for ±199900 reading range,

±500 for ±1999000 reading range,

±5000 for ±19990000 reading range.

Shown as:

19.99

199.9

1999

19.99 K

199.9 K

1999 K

19990 K

Display Update Rate Above 32°F (0°C): ½ second

@ or below 32°F (0°C): 1½ seconds

Meter Display at High

and Low Temperature

Extremes

The rated temperature limits for the local meter are listed above and are

true in that no damage to the meter will occur over these temperatures,

however the readability of the LCD is affected if taken to these

temperature extremes:

• The LCD will turn black at some temperature between 80 to 90 °C

(176 and 194 °F), rendering the display unreadable. This effect is

only temporary, and normally occurs at 90 °C (194 °F).

• At low temperatures, the update rate of the display is lengthened to

1.5 seconds due to the slower response time of the display. At -20

°C (-4 °F) the display becomes unreadable due to slow response of

the LCD. This is also only temporary and normal readability will

return when temperature returns above -20 °C (-4 °F).

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 25

Section 4 —Installation

4.1 Introduction

Section Contents This section includes these topics:

Section Topic See Page

4.1 Introduction ..................................................................................25

4.2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter.....................................................26

4.3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter..........................................................36

4.4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter .........................................................41

About this section This section provides information about installing the ST 3000

transmitter. It includes procedures for mounting, piping and wiring the

transmitter for operation.

26 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

4.2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter

Summary You can mount all transmitter models (except flush mount models and

those with integral flanges) to a 2-inch (50 millimeter) vertical or

horizontal pipe using our optional angle or flat mounting bracket, or a

bracket of your own. Flush mount models are mounted directly to the

process pipe or tank by a 1” weld nipple. Those models with integral

flanges are supported by the flange connection.

Figure 8 shows typical bracket mounted and flange mounted transmitter

installations for comparison.

Figure 8 Typical Bracket Mounted and Flange Mounted Installations

Angle

Mounting

Bracket Flat

Mounting

Bracket

Horizontal Pipe

24118

Tank

Wall

Flange

Connection Transmitter

Flange

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 27

4.2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Dimensions Detailed dimension drawings for given transmitter series and types are

listed in the back of the Installation Guide (Part number 34-ST-33-39)

for reference. Note that abbreviated overall dimensions are also shown

in the Specification Sheets for the given transmitter models.

This section assumes that the mounting dimensions have already been

taken into account and the mounting area can accommodate the

transmitter.

Bracket mounting Table 9 summarizes typical steps for mounting a transmitter to a

bracket.

Table 9 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket

Step Action

If you are using an… Then…

optional mounting bracket go to Step 2.

existing mounting bracket go to Step 3.

2 Position bracket on 2-inch (50.8 mm) horizontal or vertical pipe, and

install “U” bolt around pipe and through holes in bracket. Secure with

nuts and lockwashers provided.

Example - Angle mounting bracket secured to horizontal or vertical

pipe.

Horizontal Pipe

Mounting

Bracket

Nuts and

Lockwashers

Nuts and

Lockwashers

U-Bolt

Mounting

Bracket

Vertical Pipe

Continued on next page

28 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

4.2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Bracket mounting,

continued

Table 9 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket, continued

Step Action

3 Align appropriate mounting holes in transmitter with holes in bracket

and secure with bolts and washers provided.

If transmitter is … Then …

DP type with double ended use alternate mounting

process heads and/or holes in end of heads.

remote seals

GP and AP with single- use mounting holes in side

ended head of meter body.

In-line GP and AP use smaller “U” bolt

(STGxxL and STAxxL) provided to attach meter

body to bracket.

See figure below.

Dual-head GP and AP use mounting holes in end

of process head.

Example – Inline model transmitter mounted to optional angle

mounting bracket.

Inline models

Meter Body

Smaller

“U” bolt Use bracket for

hexagonal meter body

NOTE: If the meter body is hexagonal, you must use the additional

bracket supplied. If meter body is round, discard the

bracket.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 29

4.2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Bracket mounting,

continued

Table 9 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket, continued

4 Loosen set screw on outside neck of transmitter one full turn. Rotate

electronics housing a maximum of 180 degrees in left or right

direction from center to the position you require and tighten set screw

(13 to 15 lb-in/1.46 to 1.68 N.m).

Example - Rotating electronics housing.

Set Screw

Electronics

Housing

180 degrees

max.

180 degrees

max.

ATTENTION The metric socket head wrench kit supplied with the

SFC includes 2.5, 3, and 4mm size wrenches. You will need the

4mm size wrench for the outside set screw.

Continued on next page

30 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

4.2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

ATTENTION The mounting position of a model STA122, STA922, STA12L, or

STA92L Absolute Pressure Transmitter or a model STD110 Draft

Range Differential Pressure Transmitter is critical as the transmitter

spans become smaller. A maximum zero shift of 2.5 mm Hg for an

absolute transmitter or

1.5 inH2O for a draft range transmitter can result from a mounting

position which is rotated 90 degrees from vertical. A typical zero shift of

0.12 mm Hg or 0.20 in H2O can occur for a 5 degree rotation from

vertical.

Precautions for

Mounting

Transmitters with

Small Absolute or

Differential Pressure

Spans

To minimize these positional effects on calibration (zero shift), take the

appropriate mounting precautions that follow for the given transmitter

model.

For a model STA122, STA922, STA12L, or STA92L transmitter, you

must ensure that the transmitter is vertical when mounting it. You do

this by leveling the transmitter side-to-side and front-to-back. See

Figure 9 for suggestions on how to level the transmitter using a spirit

balance.

Figure 9 Leveling an Absolute Pressure Transmitter.

Leveling Absolute Pressure models

Center

Section

Process

Head

Position spirit balance on

center section of meter

body only.

Cont’d

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 31

4.2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter Continued

Figure 9 Leveling an Absolute Pressure Transmitter (cont’d)

Leveling Inline models

Mount transmitter vertically to assure best accuracy. Position spirit balance on pressure connection surface

of AP body.

32 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

4.2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Precautions for

Mounting

Transmitters with

Small Absolute or

Differential Pressure

Spans, continued

For a transmitter with a small differential pressure span, you must

ensure that the transmitter is vertical when mounting it. You do this by

leveling the transmitter side-to-side and front-to-back. See Figure 9 for

suggestions on how to level the transmitter using a spirit balance. You

must also zero the transmitter by following the steps in Table 10 below.

Table 10 Zero Corrects Procedure for STD110

Step Action

1 Attach the transmitter to the mounting bracket but do not completely

tighten the mounting bolts

2 Connect a tube between the input connections in the high pressure

(HP) and low pressure (LP) heads to eliminate the affects of any

surrounding air currents.

3 Connect 24 Vdc power to the transmitter and connect a digital

voltmeter or SFC to read the transmitter’s output. See Figures 18

and 38 for typical SFC connection or connect a voltmeter across the

250 ohm resistor, if desired.

4 Use the SFC and establish communications with the transmitter.

Follow the steps in Table 17, if needed.

5 While reading the transmitter’s output on an SFC or a voltmeter,

position the transmitter so the output reading is at or near zero and

then completely tighten the mounting bolts.

6 Perform an input zero correct function using the SFC and following

the steps below. This corrects the transmitter for any minor error that

may occur after the mounting bolts are tightened.

Initiate shift key selection. Press

SHIFT key

Press

INPUT

OUT-

PUT key. Read applied input pressure.

Press

RESET

COR-

RECT key. Prompt asks if the applied input pressure equals

zero input. If it is zero input, go to next keystroke. If it is not, press

[CLR] key to exit function and repeat keystrokes.

Press

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes) key. Zero input is set equal to applied input pressure.

8 Remove the tube from between the input connections, the power,

and the digital voltmeter or SFC.

9 Continue with the remaining installation tasks.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 33

4.2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Flange mounting To mount a flange mounted transmitter model, bolt the transmitter’s

flange to the flange pipe on the wall of the tank.

ATTENTION On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to accommodate the

flange extension.

Figure 10 shows a typical installation for a transmitter with the flange

on the high pressure (HP) side so the HP diaphragm is in direct contact

with the process fluid. The low pressure (LP) side of the transmitter is

vented to atmosphere (no connection).

It is the End User’s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are suitable for the

transmitter’s service condition.

To prevent degradation of performance in Flush-Mounted Flanged Transmitters, exercise care to ensure

that the internal diameter of the flange gasket does not obstruct the sensing diaphragm.

To prevent degradation of performance in Extended Mount Flanged Transmitters, ensure that there

is sufficient clearance in front of the sensing diaphragm body.

Figure 10 Typical Flange Mounted Transmitter Installation

Variable

Head H1 Reference

Leg

Attention: Dotted area indicates use

with closed tank with reference leg.

LP Side vented

to atmosphere

HP Side

mounted

to tank

Minimum Level

Maximum Level

Continued on next page

34 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

4.2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Flush mounting To mount a flush mounted model, cut a hole for a 1” standard pipe in

the tank or pipe where the transmitter is to be mounted. Weld the 1”

mounting sleeve to the wall of the tank or to the hole cut on the pipe.

Insert the meter body of the transmitter into the mounting sleeve and

secure with the locking bolt. Tighten the bolt to a torque of 6,4 Nm +/-

0,30 Nm (4.7 ft-lbs +/- 0.2 ft.-lbs.). Figure 11 shows a typical

installation for a transmitter with a flush mount on a pipe.

ATTENTION

Once the transmitter is mounted, the electronics housing can be rotated

to the desired position. See Table 9, Step 4 for details.

On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to accommodate the

mounting sleeve.

Figure 11 Typical Flush Mounted Transmitter Installation

1” Pipe Mount -

316 SS Weld Nipple

(standard option)

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 35

4.2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

High Temperature

Transmitter Mounting You can mount the High Temperature transmitter directly to the process

flange connection or the process piping. Figure 12 shows typical pipe

and flange mounted transmitter installations for comparison.

To mount a flange mounted transmitter model, bolt the transmitter’s

flange to the flange on the wall of the tank or process pipe.

It is the End User’s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and

mounting hardware that are suitable for the transmitter’s service

condition.

Once the transmitter is mounted, the electronics housing can be rotated

to the desired position. See Table 9, step 4.

ATTENTION On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to accommodate the

flange extension.

Figure 12 Typical Pipe and Flange Mounted Installations

1/2" NPT

Connection

Process Pipe

Tank

Wall

Flange

Connection Transmitter

Flange

Continued on next page

36 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

4.2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Remote seal

mounting Use the procedure in Table 11 to mount a remote diaphragm seal

transmitter model. Figure 13 shows a typical installation for a remote

diaphragm seal transmitter for reference.

WARNING Mount the transmitter flanges within the limits stated here for the given

fill-fluid in the capillary tubes with a tank at one atmosphere.

IF the fill fluid is… THEN mount the flange…

Silicone DC 200 Oil no greater than 22 feet (6.7 meters)

below the transmitter

Silicone DC 704 Oil no greater than 19 feet (5.8 meters)

below the transmitter

Chlorotrifluorethylene no greater than 11 feet (3.4 meters)

below the transmitter.

NOTE: The combination of tank vacuum and high pressure capillary

head effect should not exceed 9 psi (300 mm Hg) absolute.

Table 11 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter

Step Action

1 Mount transmitter at a remote distance determined by length of

capillary tubing.

2 If Transmitter Model Then Connect Remote

Number is… Seal on…

STR93D or STR12D high pressure (HP) side of

transmitter to lower flange

mounting on tank wall for

variable head H1.

STR13D low pressure (LP) side of

transmitter to lower flange

mounting on tank wall for

variable head H1.

ATTENTION On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to

accommodate the flange extension.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 37

4.2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Remote seal

mounting, continued

Table 11 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter, continued

Step Action

3 If Transmitter Model Then Connect Remote

Number is… Seal on…

STR93D or STR12D low pressure (LP) side of

transmitter to upper flange

mounting on tank wall for

fixed or constant head H2.

STR13D high pressure (HP) side of

transmitter to upper flange

mounting on tank wall for

fixed or constant head H2.

ATTENTION On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to

accommodate the flange extension.

4 It is the End User’s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and

mounting hardware that are suitable for the transmitter’s service

condition

Figure 13 Typical Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Installation.

Variable

Head H1

HP Side

- Model STR93D

- Model STR12D

LP Side

- Model STR13D

Minimum Level

Maximum Level

LP Side

- Model STR93D

- Model STR12D

HP Side

- Model STR13D

Fixed

Ref. Leg

38 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

4.3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter

Piping arrangements The actual piping arrangement will vary depending upon the process

measurement requirements and the transmitter model. Except for

flanged and remote diaphragm seal connections, process connections are

made to ¼ inch or ½ inch NPT female connections in the process head

of the transmitter’s meter body. For example, a differential pressure

transmitter comes with double-ended process heads with ¼ inch NPT

connections but they can be modified to accept ½ inch NPT through

optional flange adapters. Some gauge pressure transmitters may have a

½ inch NPT connection which mounts directly to a process pipe.

The most common type of pipe used is ½ inch schedule 80 steel pipe.

Many piping arrangements use a three-valve manifold to connect the

process piping to the transmitter. A manifold makes it easy to install

and remove or rezero a transmitter without interrupting the process. It

also accommodates the installation of blow-down valves to clear debris

from pressure lines to the transmitter.

Figure 14 shows a diagram of a typical piping arrangement using a

three-valve manifold and blow-down lines for a differential pressure

transmitter being used to measure flow.

Figure 14 Typical 3-Valve Manifold and Blow-Down Piping

Arrangement.

Blow-Down

Valve 3-Valve

Manifold

To Upstream TapTo Downstream Tap

To Low Pressure

Side of Transmitter To High Pressure

Side of Transmitter

Blow-Down

Valve

Blow-Down

Piping

To WasteTo Waste

Blow-Down

Piping

21010

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 39

4.3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Piping arrangements,

continued Another piping arrangement uses a block-off valve and a tee connector in

the process piping to the transmitter as shown in Figure 15.

Figure 15 Typical Piping Arrangement for ½” NPT Process Connection

Block-off Valve

1/2" NPT

Connection

Tank Wall

Transmitter location Table 12 lists the mounting location for the transmitter depending on the

process.

Table 12 Suggested Transmitter Location for Given Process

Process Suggested Location Explanation

Gases Above the gas line The condensate drains away from

the transmitter.

Liquids 1. Below but close to the

elevation of the process

connection.

2. Level with or above the

process connection.

1. This minimizes the static head

effect of the condensate.

2. This requires a siphon to

protect the transmitter from

process steam. The siphon

retains water as a “fill fluid.”

ATTENTION For liquid or steam, the piping should slope a minimum of 25.4 mm

(1 inch) per 305 mm (1 foot). Slope the piping down towards the

transmitter if the transmitter is below the process connection so the

bubbles may rise back into the piping through the liquid. If the

transmitter is located above the process connection, the piping should rise

vertically above the transmitter; then slope down towards the flowline

with a vent valve at the high point. For gas measurement, use a

condensate leg and drain at the low point (freeze protection may be

required here).

See Appendix B for some suggested freeze protection solutions.

40 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

Continued on next page

4.3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

ATTENTION Care must be taken when installing transmitters on hot processes. The

operating temperature limits for the device (as outlined in Table 5) must

not be exceeded. Impulse piping may be used to reduce the temperature

of the process that comes into contact with the transmitter meter body.

As a general rule there is a 56 degree C drop (100 degree F) in the

temperature of the process for every foot of ½ inch uninsulated piping.

Process connections Table 13 describes typical process connections for a given type of

transmitter.

Table 13 Process Connections

Transmitter Type Process Connection

Differential

Pressure • Process heads with 1/4-inch NPT female connection.

• Flange adapters and manifolds with 1/2-inch female

connection are optional.

• Models with pseudo flange on one side include 2- or 3-

inch ANSI class 150 flange.

Gauge Pressure • Process head with 1/2-inch NPT female connection

(Series 100).

• In-line 1/2-inch NPT female connection (STGxxL).

• In-line ½ inch NPT male

• 9/16 AMINCO

• DIN 19213

• Process heads with 1/4-inch NPT female connection

(STG9x4).

• Flange adapters and manifolds with 1/2-inch female

connections are optional (STG9x4).

• 2-inch Sanitary Tri-Clamp (STGxxT)

• Flush mount in 1-inch weld sleeve, with O-ring and

locking bolt (STGxxP).

Absolute Pressure • Process head with 1/2-inch NPT female connection.

(STAx22, x40).

• In-line ½ inch NPT male

• 9/16 AMINCO

• DIN 19213

Flange Mounted

Liquid Level • Small flange 1/2-inch, 1-, 1 ½ - and 2-inch (STFxxT)

• 2, 3- or 4-inch flange with flush or 2-, 4- or 6-inch

extended diaphragm (See Table 14) on high pressure

side.*

• DN 50, 80, or 100 PN 40 flange with flush or 2, 4 or 6

inch extended diaphragm (See Table 14) on High

Pressure Side*.

Remote

Diaphragm Seals See Model Selection Guide for description of available

Flanged, Threaded, Chemical Tee, Saddle, and Sanitary

process connections.

* Reference side has standard differential pressure process head.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 41

4.3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Flange descriptions Table 14 describes the available flange connections for flange mounted

liquid level transmitters.

Table 14 Flange Description

Transmitter Type Description

Flush or Extended

Diaphragm 2-inch 150# serrated–face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 120.7

mm (4.75 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 150 mm (5.91 in).

2-inch 150# serrated–face flange with 8 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 127 mm

(5.00 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 165 mm (6.50 in).

3-inch 150# serrated–face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 152.4

mm (6.00 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm (7.48 in).

3-inch 300# serrated–face flange with 8 holes 22.2 mm (7/8 in) diameter on 168.3

mm (6.62 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 210 mm (8.27 in).

4-inch 150# serrated–face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 190.5

mm (7.50 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 230 mm (9.05 in).

4-inch 300# serrated–face flange with 8 holes 22.2 mm (7/8 in) diameter on 255

mm (10.04 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 200 mm (7.87 in).

DN 50 PN 40 serrated–face flange with 4 holes 18 mm (0.71 in) diameter on 125

mm (4.92 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 165 mm (6.50 in).

DN 80 PN 40 serrated–face flange with 8 holes 18 mm (0.71 in) diameter on 160

mm (6.30 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 200 mm (7.87 in).

DN 100 PN 40 serrated–face flange with 8 holes 22 mm (0.87 in) diameter on 190

mm (7.48 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 235 mm (9.25 in).

Pseudo Flange Head 2-inch, 150 lbs serrated-face flange with 4 holes 15.9 mm (5/8 in) diameter on

120.6 mm (4-3/4 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 152.4 mm (6

in).

3-inch, 150 lbs serrated-face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 152

mm (6 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm (7-1/2 in).

Flush Mount

Gauge STG93P

25.4 mm (1” pipe mount) (316L SS standard option.)

General piping

guidelines • When measuring fluids containing suspended solids, install

permanent valves at regular intervals to blow-down piping.

• Blow-down all lines on new installations with compressed air or

steam and flush them with process fluids (where possible) before

connecting these lines to the transmitter’s meter body.

• Be sure all the valves in the blow-down lines are closed tight after the

initial blow-down procedure and each maintenance procedure after

that.

Continued on next page

42 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

4.3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Installing flange

adapter Table 15 gives the steps for an optional flange adapter on the process

head.

ATTENTION Slightly deforming the gasket supplied with the adapter before you

insert it into the adapter may aid in retaining the gasket in the groove

while you align the adapter to the process head. To deform the gasket,

submerse it in hot water for a few minutes then firmly press it into its

recessed mounting groove in the adapter.

Table 15 Installing Flange Adapter

Step Action

1 Insert filter screen (if supplied) into inlet cavity of process head.

2 Carefully seat Teflon (white) gasket into adapter groove.

3 Thread adapter onto 1/2-inch process pipe and align mounting holes

in adapter with holes in end of process head as required.

4 Secure adapter to process head by hand tightening 7/16-20 hex-

head bolts.

Example – Installing adapter on process head.

Process

Head

Filter Screen

Teflon Gasket

Flange Adapter

7/16 x 20 Bolts 21011

ATTENTION Apply an anti-seize compound on the stainless steel

bolts prior to threading them into the process head.

5 Evenly torque flange adapter bolts to a torque of 27,1 Nm +/- 1,4 Nm

(20 ft lbs +/- 1.0 ft lbs)

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 43

4.4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter

Summary The transmitter is designed to operate in a two-wire power/current loop

with loop resistance and power supply voltage within the operating

range shown in Figure 16.

Figure 16 Operating Range for ST 3000 Transmitters.

0 10.8 16.28 20.63 25 28.3 37.0 42.4

250

450

650

800

1200

1440

Operating Voltage (Vdc)

= Operating

Area

NOTE: A minimum of

250 0hms of loop

resistance is

necessary to support

communications. Loop

resistance equals

barrier resistance plus

wire resistance plus

receiver resistance.

Also 45 volt operation

is permitted if not an

intrinsically safe

installation.

Loop

Resistance

(ohms)

21012

Loop wiring is connected to the transmitter by simply attaching the

positive (+) and negative (–) loop wires to the positive (+) and negative

(–) SIGNAL screw terminals on the terminal block in the transmitter’s

electronics housing shown in Figure 17.

Each transmitter includes an internal ground terminal to connect the

transmitter to earth ground. A ground terminal can be optionally added

to the outside of the electronics housing. While it is not necessary to

ground the transmitter for proper operation, we suggest that you do so to

minimize the possible effects of “noise” on the output signal and

provide additional protection against lightning and static discharge

damage.

Note that grounding may be required to meet optional approval body

certification. Refer to section 3.2 CE Conformity (Europe) Notice for

special conditions.

Optional lightning protection (option LP) can be ordered for transmitters

that will be installed in areas highly susceptible to lightning strikes.

Figure 17 shows the 5-screw terminal block used when the lightning

protection option is ordered.

Continued on next page

44 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

4.4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Summary, continued Barriers can be installed per manufacturer’s instructions for transmitters

to be used in intrinsically safe applications.

Figure 17 ST 3000 Transmitter Terminal Block

- SIGNAL +

+ -

TEST

Terminal

Block

Electronics

Housing

Internal

Ground

Terminal

3-Screw Terminal Block

L-

SIGNAL

METER

TESTSIGNAL

Terminal

Block

Electronics

Housing

Internal

Ground

Terminal

5-Screw Terminal Block

Lightning Protection Option (LP)

TPS reference Transmitters that are to be digitally integrated to Honeywell’s TPS

system will be connected to the Smart Transmitter Interface Module in

the Process Manager, Advanced Process Manager or High Performance

Process Manager through a Field Termination Assembly. Details about

the TPS system connections are given in the PM/APM Smartline

Transmitter Integration Manual PM12-410 which is part of the TDC

3000X system bookset.

Allen-Bradley PLC If you are digitally integrating the ST 3000 to an Allen Bradley PLC, the

same FTA and wiring procedures used with Honeywell’s TPS system

are also used with the Allen-Bradley 1771 and 1746 platforms.

For more information, contact:

ProSoft Technology, Inc.

(800) 326-7066 or

http://www.psft.com

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 45

4.4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Wiring connections

and installation

drawings

The procedure in Table 16 shows the steps for connecting power to the

transmitter. For loop wiring and external wiring diagrams, refer to the

installation drawings presented in Section 13. Detailed drawings are

provided for transmitter installation in non-intrinsically safe areas and

for intrinsically safe loops in hazardous area locations. If you are using

the transmitter with Honeywell’s TPS system, see the previous TPS

reference.

ATTENTION • All wiring must comply with local codes, regulations, and

ordinances.

• If you will be using the transmitter in a hazardous area, be sure to

review the hazardous location reference data included in Appendix

D of this manual before operating the transmitter.

Table 16 Wiring the Transmitter

Step Action

Loosen end-cap lock using a 1.5 mm allen wrench and remove end-

cap cover from terminal block end of electronics housing.

Feed loop power leads through one of conduit entrances on either

side of electronics housing. Plug whichever entrance you do not use.

ATTENTION The transmitter accepts up to 16 AWG wire.

3 Observing polarity, connect positive loop power lead to SIGNAL +

terminal and negative loop power lead to SIGNAL – terminal.

Example – Connecting loop power to transmitter.

3-screw terminal block

- SIGNAL +

+ -

TEST

Loop

Power

5-screw terminal (option LP)

SIGNAL

METER

TESTSIGNAL

Loop

Power

4 Replace end-cap, and tighten end-cap lock.

Continued on next page

46 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

4.4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Approval body

requirements If your transmitter was ordered with Table III option 3N for self-

declared approval per 94/9/EC (ATEX4), you must use a power supply

that includes a voltage limiting device that will keep the voltage to the

transmitter from exceeding 42 Vdc. You can achieve this by using a

battery as the supply or one of these voltage limiting means.

• Double wound mains transformer per BS 3535 or equivalent.

• An adequately rated zener diode whose voltage is not significantly

higher than the rated voltage.

• An adequately rated semiconductor voltage regulator.

Lightning protection When your transmitter is equipped with optional lightning protection,

you must connect a wire from the transmitter to ground as shown in

Figure 18 to make the protection effective. We recommend that you use

a size 8 AWG (American Wire Gage) or (8.37mm2) bare or green

covered wire.

Figure 18 Ground Connection for Lightning Protection.

Electronics

Housing

Connect to

Earth Ground

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 47

4.4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Process Sealing

Explosionproof

Conduit seal

The ST 3000, Series 100, 100e, 600, and 900, Smart Pressure

Transmitters are CSA certified as “Dual Seal” devices in accordance

with ANSI/ISA–12.27.01–2003, Requirements for Process Sealing

between Electrical Systems and Flammable or Combustible Process

Fluids.

Transmitters installed as explosionproof in a Class I, Division 1, Group

A Hazardous (Classified) Location in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70,

the US National Electrical Code (NEC), require a “LISTED”

explosionproof seal to be installed in the conduit, within 18 inches of

the transmitter. Crouse-Hinds® type EYS/EYD or EYSX/EYDX are

examples of “LISTED” explosionproof seals that meets this

requirement.

Transmitters installed as explosionproof in a Class I, Division 1, Group

B, C or D Hazardous (Classified) Locations do not require an

explosionproof seal to be installed in the conduit.

NOTE: Installation should conform to all national and local electrical

code requirements.

WARNING When installed as explosionproof in a Division 1 Hazardous Location,

keep covers tight while the transmitter is energized. Disconnect power

to the transmitter in the non-hazardous area prior to removing end caps

for service.

When installed as nonincendive equipment in a Division 2 Hazardous

Location, disconnect power to the transmitter in the non-hazardous area,

or determine that the location is non-hazardous prior to disconnecting or

connecting the transmitter wires.

Continued on next page

48 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

4.4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued

Existing meter

connections Existing analog meters and SM 3000 Smart Meters can be connected to

Release 300 transmitters. Examples of each meter type are shown

below.

Analog Meter

100

Analog Meter Connections —You can connect the

analog meter (2-wires) integrally to Release 300

transmitter’s terminal block inside the electronics

housing. However, there are alternate wiring

methods for connecting an analog meter remotely

with the loop wiring. Section 13 in this manual

illustrates alternate wiring methods for connecting

an analog meter to Release 300 transmitters.

Smart Meter

0100

SM 3000 Smart Meter Connections —The smart

meter (3-wires) can be connected remotely to a

Release 300 transmitter. Section 13 in this manual

illustrates alternate wiring methods for connecting

this smart meter to Release 300 transmitters.

New Smart Meter with Local Zero and Span

UPPE R

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

SPAN

ZERO

%100

New Smart Meter Connections – The new integral

smart meter (8-wires) is connected directly to the

transmitter’s PWA and is mounted to the

electronics module assembly inside the electronics

housing. The new integral smart meter is designed

for the ST 3000 Release 300 transmitter and

provides functionality not available with other

smart meter designs.

NOTE: Only one smart meter should be installed

integrally to the transmitter.

ATTENTION Be aware that the RMA 300 remote meter does not have custom and

flow units capability like the new smart meter. Therefore, if you use a

local smart meter that is configured to display readings in custom or

flow units in conjunction with an RMA 300 remote meter, the readings

of the two meters will be in different units.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 49

Section 5 —Getting Started

5.1 Introduction

Section Contents This section includes these topics:

Section Topic See Page

5.1 Introduction ..................................................................................49

5.2 Establishing Communications ......................................................50

5.3 Making Initial Checks ...................................................................54

5.4 Changing Mode of Operation .......................................................57

About this section If you have never used an SFC to “talk” to an ST 3000 transmitter, this

section tells you how to establish communications, make initial checks,

and change the transmitter’s mode of operation.

50 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

5.2 Establishing Communications

SFC connection rules • Always plug the SFC leads into the jack on the SFC before you

connect them to the transmitter.

• Use this formula to find the maximum filter capacitance allowed

across the sense resistor (250 ohm minimum) for SFC

communications to work.

C (µF) = 1000 / Rsense

Connecting SFC Using either leads with alligator clips or easy-hooks supplied with the

SFC, you connect the SFC directly to signal terminals on the

transmitter’s terminal block or at any convenient location in the 4 to 20

milliampere line. Observing polarity, connect the red lead to positive (+)

and the black lead to negative (–).

WARNING When the transmitter’s end-cap is removed, the housing is not

explosionproof.

Figure 19 shows typical SFC connections across loop wiring to the

ST 3000 transmitter. (Non-lightning protection terminal connections

shown.)

Figure 19 Typical SFC Connections.

+ Red

- Black

Field

Terminals

- SIGNAL +

+ -

TEST

STR3012

Power

Supply

Receiver

SFC

ST 3000

250

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 51

5.2 Establishing Communications, Continued

Starting

communications Once you connect the SFC to the transmitter or loop wiring, you are

ready to start communicating with the transmitter. The procedure in

Table 17 outlines the steps for communications with an ST 3000

transmitter without an assigned tag number.

Table 17 Starting Communications with Transmitter.

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 Slide power switch on left side of SFC to

ON position. SFC runs its self check and displays

initial prompt.

2 PUT IN MANLOOP

DE X TMR RE S ISDP–

If this prompt appears, transmitter is

in Analog mode of operation. This is

the factory default mode of

operation setting. Put your control

loop in the manual mode of

operation before initiating SFC

communications. Note that you must

do this separately through the

receiving device in the loop.

If this prompt appears, transmitter is

in Digital (DE) mode of operation.

3 DE READ

TA ON.G

?TRIPS SECURED?

Go to Step 5

Be sure any switches that may trip

alarms or interlocks associated with

analog loop are secured or turned

off. Go to Step 4.

This prompt does not appear for

transmitters operating in DE mode.

See DE transmitter display response

in Step 5.

4 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

Confirms that “TRIPS” are secured. Go

to Step 5 for display response. Required for transmitters operating

in analog mode only.

Continued on next page

52 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

5.2 Establishing Communications, Continued

Starting

communications,

continued

Table 17 Starting Communications with Transmitter, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

5 TA ON.G

SFC WORK ING.. .

LIN AG NO.DP T

DE X TMTA OG.RN

–

TAG O

ORXT ONM ES

NSRPE

Message exchange is taking place

Note that communications with

transmitter are blocked until [ID] key

is pressed.

Transmitter is in analog

transmission mode. “LIN” means

transmitter is set for linear output

instead of square root (SQRT). “DP”

means transmitter is differential

pressure type instead of gauge

pressure (GP) or absolute pressure

(AP). Last eight columns in bottom

row are blank when no tag number

has been assigned to this

transmitter. Go to Step 8.

Transmitter is in digital (DE)

transmission mode. Last eight

columns in bottom row are blank

when no tag number has been

assigned to this transmitter. Go to

Step 7.

Communication error messages are

cycled at two second intervals and

display returns to initial prompt. Go

to Step 6.

6 There is a communication problem,

check the

• power and SFC connections - Is the

polarity correct; red to positive and

black to negative?

• loop resistance - Is there a minimum

of 250 ohms resistance between the

SFC and the power supply?

• power supply - Is power applied, is

there greater than 11 volts at the

transmitter, and are you within the

operating area on the curve in Figure

16?

Correct any wiring, resistance, or

power supply problems, and try

communicating again - Press [ID]

key.

If you are still not getting the

correct display, note error

messages and refer to

Troubleshooting section in this

manual for probable cause.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 53

5.2 Establishing Communications, Continued

Starting

communications,

continued

Table 17 Starting Communications with Transmitter, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

7 ^

SHIFT

DE READ

DE X TMTA OG.RN

–

SHI T–

TA ON.G

S FC WORK I NG–. 33%

LIN AG NO.DP T

Initiates shift key selection.

Begins upload of configuration

database from transmitter.

Operation completion rate is shown

in percent. Note that display for ID

response reverts to style used for

transmitter in analog mode when

upload is completed.

8 F/S DIR

STAT

ST A ST

FC WOSING.RK . .

ST A ST

TA USSHECKC=O

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

Initiates status check.

If messages other than this one are

cycled in display, refer to the

Troubleshooting section in this

manual for an explanation of the

message, the probable cause, and

any corrective action.

Signals end of status messages for

display.

ATTENTION When assigned,

the transmitter’s tag number also

appears in the top row of the

display.

9 You have established

communications with transmitter and

are ready to initiate other SFC

operations.

54 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

5.3 Making Initial Checks

Checking mode and

software Before doing anything else, it is a good idea to confirm the transmitter’s

mode of operation and identify the version of software being used in the

SFC and the transmitter. Table 18 outlines the steps for quickly

checking the transmitter’s mode of operation and software versions of

the SFC and the transmitter.

Table 18 Confirming Mode of Operation and Identifying Software Versions.

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 ^

SHIFT

A <–>DE

LIN T ØØØDP S

FT–SHI

A/ DE

HN T OCG DE

ST 3ØØØ

A/ DE

HN T OCG AN

ST 3ØØØ

ALOG

Initiates shift key selection. Note that

transmitter tag number ST 3000 in

top row is used for example

purposes only.

Asks if you want to change to DE

(digital) mode. This means

transmitter is in analog mode of

operation.

Asks if you want to change to

analog mode. This means

transmitter is in DE (digital) mode of

operation.

2 CLR

(No)

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

T ØØØS3

Exits analog to DE change function.

3 ^

SHIFT

SW VER

LIN T ØØØDP S

FT–SHI

S/ ON.

SFC 4. 5 XMTR

=.Ø

S T 3 ØØØ

Initiates shift key selection.

Both SFC and XMTR software

versions appear in display. Note that

only SFC version appears when

SFC is not connected to transmitter

or [SHIFT] and [ID] keys have not yet

been pressed for transmitter in DE

mode.

4 CLR

(NO)

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

T ØØØS3

Exit function. SFC is “READY” for

next operation.

Analog and DE

modes In the analog transmission mode, the transmitter sends a proportional 4

to 20 milliampere output signal that can be used as a compatible analog

input signal to a controller or a recorder in the control room

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 55

5.3 Making Initial Checks, Continued

Analog and DE

modes, continued A transmitter in the digital (DE) mode can communicate in a direct

digital fashion with Honeywell’s TPS system and Allen-Bradley PLCs.

The digital signal can include process variable as well as configuration

database data depending upon the broadcast format selected during

configuration.

Software version

compatibility The SFC model STS103 with software version 5.0 or greater is fully

compatible with all Series 100 and Series 900 Release 300 transmitters.

The SFC will operate with transmitters that have older software

versions, but functions will be limited to those applicable for the

transmitter software.

Write protect option The ST 3000 transmitters are available with what is called a “write

protect option”. It consists of a jumper located on the transmitter’s PWA

that you can position to allow read and write access or read only access

to the transmitter’s configuration database. When the write protect

option is ordered, transmitters are shipped with a default jumper position

for read-only. This means that the transmitter’s configuration database

can not be overwritten. To allow read/write access, the jumper can be

moved to the read/write position. When the write protect option is not

ordered access is read/write.

Figure 20 shows the location of the write protect jumper on the PWA for

Release 300 transmitters.

Figure 20 Write Protect Jumper Location and Selections.

Failsafe

Direction

Jumper

Meter

Connector

Power

Connector

Read and

Write

Read Only

56 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

5.3 Making Initial Checks, Continued

Local smart meter

display indications You can check the status of all the indicators on the Local Smart Meter

LCD display by cycling power to the transmitter. The meter runs a brief

self-test whenever power is applied to the transmitter. All the display

indicators are lit during the self-test as shown in Figure 21.

Figure 21 Display With All Indicators Lit.

100

18 8

ANALOG

FLOW

In H O

GPH mmHg

GPM PSI

OUTPUT MODE

CHECK STATUS

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

SPAN

ZERO

KNOWN VALUE

Please refer to Table 31 in this manual for a description of the pushbuttons

on the meter face. See Section 8.6 for a description of the indicators with

examples of typical display indications and error codes. (Note that the

display may revert to dashes (– – –) after the self-test until the transmitter

initializes all its functions.) Use the SFC to check the transmitter’s status.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 57

5.4 Changing Mode of Operation

Procedure If you need to change your transmitter’s mode of operation, use the

steps in Table 19 to change the mode from analog to digital or digital to

analog. If you have an optional Local Smart Meter, you can readily tell

your transmitter’s present mode of operation by checking whether the

ANALOG indicator on the meter display is lit or not.

Attention: Only transmitters with Option DE can be set to DE Mode.

Table 19 Changing Mode of Operation.

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 ^

SHIFT

A <–>DE

LIN T ØØØDP S

FT–SHI

A/ DE

HN T OCG DE

ST 3ØØØ

A/ DE

HN T OCG AN

ST 3ØØØ

ALOG

Initiates shift key selection. Note that

transmitter tag number ST 3000 in

top row is used for example

purposes only.

Asks if you want to change to DE

(digital) mode. If you want to change

mode, go to Step 2. If you do not

want to change mode, press [CLR]

key to exit function.

Asks if you want to change to

analog mode. If you want to change

mode, go to Step 2. If you do not

want to change mode, press [CLR]

key to exit function.

2 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

A/ DE

RE YOASU

ST 3ØØØ

REU

Prompt asks for confirmation of

mode change.

3 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

A/ DE

FC WOSIN

ST 3ØØØ

RK ..

A/ DE

ST 3ØØØ

MTDE

A/ DE

NA G

ST 3ØØØ

XMLO TRA

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

T ØØØS3

Message exchange is working.

Mode of operation is now DE

(digital).

Mode of operation is now analog.

Ready for next function.

Continued on next page

58 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

5.4 Changing Mode of Operation, Continued

Keystroke summary Figure 22 shows keystroke summary for changing mode of

operation for quick reference.

Figure 22 Keystroke Summary for Changing Mode of Operation.

SHIFT

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

A <–>DE

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 59

Section 6 —Configuration

6.1 Introduction

Section Contents This section includes these topics:

Section Topic See Page

6.1 Introduction ..................................................................................59

6.2 Overview ......................................................................................60

6.3 Entering a Tag Number................................................................71

6.4 Selecting Output Form .................................................................73

6.5 Adjusting Damping Time ..............................................................76

6.6 Selecting Unit of Measurement ....................................................78

6.7 Setting Range Values Using SFC ................................................80

6.8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments..........................84

6.9 Selecting Output Signal Mode (DE Mode Only)...........................91

6.10 Selecting Message Format (DE Mode Only).................................94

6.11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC............................................96

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons.............................103

6.13 Disconnecting SFC ....................................................................122

About this section This section introduces you to ST 3000 transmitter configuration. It

identifies the parameters that make up the transmitter’s configuration

database and provides procedures for entering values/selections for the

given configuration parameters.

ATTENTION If you will be using the SCT 3000 software Release 3.12.2 or greater

instead of an SFC to configure the transmitter, follow the SCT 3000 on-

line help and on-line documentation to configure the transmitter’s

database.

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.2 Overview

About configuration Each ST 3000 Transmitter includes a configuration database which

defines its particular operating characteristics. You can use an SFC to

change selected parameters within a given transmitter’s database to alter

its operating characteristics. We call this process of viewing and/or

changing database parameters “configuration”.

Figure 23 shows a graphic summation of the configuration process.

Figure 23 Summary of Configuration Process

ST 3000

Configuration Database

Transmitter's

Operating

Characteristics

View and/or

change

database

parameters

SFC

ATTENTION If the transmitter is operating in the DE mode, you can also configure

the transmitter’s configuration database through displays at the

Universal Station or GUS. See the PM/APM Smartline Integration

Manual PM12-410 for details.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 61

6.2 Overview, Continued

SFC and ST 3000

transmitter memories Both the SFC and the ST 3000 transmitter have working memories as

shown in Figure 24. They serve as temporary storage areas for data

exchanged between the SFC and the transmitter during communications.

The transmitter also has a non-volatile memory as the permanent storage

area for a backup copy of all the data held in the working memory. This

memory retains its data even if the transmitter loses power.

The SFC has a second temporary storage area called the hold memory.

This memory supports the SFC’s save and restore functions. It serves as

the temporary storage area for a configuration database saved from a

transmitter until it can be restored in a transmitter. Data in this memory

can not be displayed or altered, and it will be lost if the SFC is turned off.

Figure 24 shows the working relationship between SFC and transmitter

memories during communications.

Figure 24 SFC and ST 3000 Transmitter Memories.

Working

Memory

Working

Memory

Non/Volatile

Memory

Hold

Memory

ST 3000

SFC

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.2 Overview, Continued

Copying data into

non-volatile memory

ATTENTION

When setting-up or configuring a ST 3000, whether you are changing one

element or a full database, all configuration data must be copied into the

transmitter’s non-volatile memory.

Normally, thirty seconds after a value is changed the transmitter

automatically copies it into the non-volatile memory. But, if you change

an element and power goes down before the change is copied to non-

volatile memory, you will lose the data in the working memory.

Therefore, whenever you make any changes in the transmitter using the

SFC, always end your procedure by pressing SHIFT and ENTER. This

action immediately copies the changes from working memory to non-

volatile memory.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 63

6.2 Overview, Continued

What to configure Table 20 summarizes the parameters that are included in the

configuration database for an ST 3000 pressure transmitter in either the

analog or DE mode of operation.

Be aware that configuration data for the transmitter as well as for the

Local Smart Meter is stored in a non-volatile memory on the

transmitter’s PWA and make up the transmitter’s configuration

database. Therefore, the transmitter and meter configuration are lost if

the PWA is replaced. Performing a save and restore function using the

SFC will preserve the transmitter’s configuration database. See Section

8.5 for the steps to perform save and restore functions using the SFC.

ATTENTION Since the SFC is compatible with other Honeywell Smartline

transmitters, be sure all configuration data applies to a pressure

transmitter.

Table 20 Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters

Configuration Data Setting or Selection

Transmitter Tag Number Up to eight characters

Damping Time Constant Any one of these value selections in seconds:

0.00 0.5 4.0 32.0

0.2 1.0 8.0

0.3 2.0 16.0

Type of Output Conformity LIN (Linear)

SQRT (Square Root)

Unit of Measurement ATTENTION Note that ST 3000 transmitters with inches of water

ranges are factory calibrated using pressure referenced to a temperature

of 39.2°F (4°C).

Pressure readings can be displayed in any one of these pre-programmed

engineering units:

“H2O_39F PSI MPa bar KG/cm^2 mmH2O_4C

mmHg_0C KPa mbar G/cm^2 inHg_32F mH2O_4C

“H2O_68F ATM “H2O_60F

LRV (Lower Range Value)

(Process input for 4 mAdc

(0%) output)

Key in desired value through SFC keyboard or set LRV to applied

pressure.

URV (Upper Range Value)

(Process input for 20 mAdc

(100%) output)

Key in desired value through SFC keyboard or set URV to applied

pressure.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.2 Overview, Continued

What to configure,

continued

Table 20 Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters, continued

Configuration Data Setting or Selection

The following parameters are for transmitters in DE mode of operation only.

Mode of Output Signal

Indication Any one of these selections based on control system information needs:

Single Range Sends the PV value corresponding to the

transmitter’s working range (PVw) to the

control system for display. For systems using

STDC card or STIMV IOP module (also called

STIM Smart Transmitter Interface Module).

Dual Range (STDC) Sends the PV values corresponding to the

transmitter’s full range (PVt) and working range

(PVw) measurements to the control system

for display. For systems using STDC card only.

Single Rng W/SV Sends PV value corresponding to the

transmitter’s working range (PVw) and

temperature value from the transmitter’s sensor

to the control system for display. For systems

using STDC card or STIMV IOP module.

Message Format Choose one of these broadcast types for data transmission to the digital

control system: Note that “DB” in following selection prompt stands for

“database”.

w/oDB (4 Byte) Byte 1 is output signal mode

Bytes 2 to 4 are PV value

FLAG PV PV PV

1234

w/DB (6 Byte) Byte 1 is output signal mode

Bytes 2 to 4 are PV value

Byte 5 is data type identifier (LRV, URV span, etc.)

Byte 6 is data being sent

FLAG PV PV PV

1234

ID DB

ATTENTION The approximate rates of transmission in repeats per

second are:

Data 4 - Byte 6 - Byte

PV value 3 rpts/sec 2.5 rpts/sec

Temperature 1 rpt/2.5 sec 1 rpt/3 sec

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 65

6.2 Overview, Continued

What to configure,

continued

Table 20 Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters, continued

Configuration Data Setting or Selection

Failsafe Mode NOTE: This parameter is valid only to select the failsafe action for the

STDC card in a controller - not the transmitter. If you are using

the STDC card to interface with the ST 3000 transmitter, contact

Honeywell Technical Assistance in using this parameter.

ATTENTION An STIMV IOP module has built-in failsafe capabilities

and ignores this parameter.

The following parameters are only for transmitters with optional Local Smart Meter.

Meter Engineering Units If the transmitter is set for LINEAR output conformity, you can choose to

have the Local Smart Meter display pressure readings in one of these

engineering units:

“H2O_39F PSI MPa BAR Kg/cm^2 inHg_32F

mmHg_0C KPa mBAR g/cm^2 mmH2O_4C mH2O_4C

Custom %

If the transmitter is set for SQUARE ROOT output conformity, you can

choose to have the Local Smart Meter display flow readings in one of

these engineering units:

GPM GPH Custom %

Engineering Units High and

Low You can enter desired lower and upper (high) display limits to scale flow

(GPM, GPH) or Custom engineering units to represent the transmitter’s

0 to 100% output within the meter’s display range of ±19,990,000.

ATTENTION When the transmitter is set to SQUARE ROOT output

conformity, the lower display limit for flow units (GPM, GPH) and Custom

unit must equal zero (0).

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.2 Overview, Continued

Configuration

decision summary The flowchart in Figure 25 summarizes the typical entries/selections

decisions associated with configuring an ST 3000 pressure transmitter.

Figure 25 Flowchart — ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration.

Have you

assigned a unique

"tag number" for

the transmitter?

Start

YES

Assign a unique tag number consisting of up to 8

alphanumeric characters to identify this transmitter.

Establish communications and

enter assigned Tag Number at

SFC configuration prompt TAG

NO.

See procedure in Table 21 for entry details.

Press [ID] key and acknowledge TRIPS SECURED prompt, if

required, to call up SFC prompt TAG NO. Use [NUM/ALPHA]

key to toggle between Alpha mode and Numeric mode to

enter alphabetic characters and numbers, respectively,

through SFC keys.

Do you know if

output is to represent

linear or square root

calculation?

YES

Determine if transmitter's output is to represent a

straight linear calculation or a square root calculation

for flow measurements.

Select LINEAR or SQUARE ROOT

through SFC configuration

prompt CONFORMITY.

See procedure in Table 22 for selection details.

Call up SFC configuration prompt CONFORMITY and select

menu item LINEAR or SQUARE ROOT.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 67

6.2 Overview, Continued

Configuration

decision summary,

continued

Figure 25 Flowchart — ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration, continued.

Do you know how

much damping time

is needed?

YES

Determine appropriate damping time value for your

process. We suggest that you set the damping to the

largest value that is reasonable for your process.

Select desired damping time

value in seconds through the

SFC prompt DAMP.

See procedure in Table 23 for selection details.

Press [DAMP] key and use [NEXT] or [PREV] key to select

stored damping time value through SFC prompt DAMP 1.

Do you know what

engineering units to

use for pressure

readings?

YES

See Unit of Measurement in Table 24 for list of available

pre-programmed engineering units in the SFC.

Select desired pre-programmed

engineering units through SFC

prompt UNITS.

See procedure in Table 24 for selection details.

Call up a pressure value on the SFC display and repeatedly

press [UNITS] key to select desired pre-programmed

engineering units through the SFC prompt UNITS 1.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.2 Overview, Continued

Configuration

decision summary,

continued

Figure 25 Flowchart — ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration, continued.

Do you know what

range values to use

YES

Determine Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range

Value (URV) to be used for setting range values.

Set LRV and URV to desired

values through SFC prompts

LRV 1 and URV 1.

See procedure in Table 25 or 26 for range setting details.

Use [LRV] and [URV] keys to call up respective SFC prompts

for keying in range values or setting range values to applied

pressures.

Will transmitter be

operating in DE

mode?

YES

Select appropriate DE

configuration parameters

through SFC prompt DE CONF.

See procedures in Tables 28 and 29 for DE

parameter selections.

Press [SHIFT] and [MENU ITEM] keys to call up

DE configuration menu.

continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 69

6.2 Overview, Continued

Configuration

decision summary,

continued

Figure 25 Flowchart — ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration, Continued.

Does transmitter

have Local Smart

Meter option?

YES

Use buttons on face of Local

Smart Meter or SFC to select

engineering units and range

values as applicable.

See procedures in Tables 33 to 36 for configuring Local

Smart Meter for operation.

End

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.2 Overview, Continued

SFC interface

characteristics Keep these three basic interface characteristics in mind when you use

the SFC to configure a transmitter.

• If the displayed prompt contains a cursor, you can key in a number or

an alphabetic character in that space. However, to key in an alphabetic

character, you must first press the [NUM/ALPHA] key to initiate the

alphabet selection or alpha mode.

• Example:

LIN AG NO.DP T

Cursor

LIN AG NO.DP T

Alpha Mode

NUM/

ALPHA

• If the displayed prompt includes an equal sign (=), you can make

another selection after the equal sign by pressing the [MENU ITEM] key to

call up the next selection Note that you can use the [s NEXT ] key to call

up the next parameter or the [t PREV] key to return to the previous

parameter.

• Example:

DE T ØØØON S

OLoB/

3CF

F/S=

DE T ØØØON S

OHiB/

3CF

F/S=

ITEM

DE CONF

• If the displayed prompt contains a question mark (?), you can initiate

the action in question by pressing the [ENTER] key to answer yes or

abort it by pressing the [CLR] key to answer no.

• Example:

LRV

PT 3Ø11

ELRV?S

To initiate setting of LRV to applied pressure, press

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

To abort setting of LRV to applied pressure, press CLR

(NO)

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 71

6.3 Entering a Tag Number

ATTENTION There is a Configuration Record Sheet provided in Appendix C, if you

want to record the configuration data for your transmitter.

Procedure The procedure in Table 21 shows how to enter a sample tag number of

PT 3011 into the transmitter’s configuration database.

Table 21 Entering Tag Number

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 DE READ

TA ON.G

?TRIPS SECURED?

Be sure any switches that may trip

alarms or interlocks associated with

analog loop are secured or turned

off. This prompt only appears for

transmitters in analog mode

2 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TA ON.G

SFC WORK ING.. .

LIN AG NO.DP T

Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured

and establish transmitter

communications

ATTENTION This procedure

also applies for transmitters in DE

mode. The prompt may show DE -

XMTR instead of output form and

transmitter type in top row, if you

have not established

communications as previously

described in Section 5.2 of this

manual.

2 NUM/

ALPHA

LIN AG NO.DP T

Put SFC keyboard into alpha mode.

Activates alphabetic characters in

upper right hand corner of keys.

3 9

SCR PAD

LIN AG NO.DP T

Key in P, T, and space as first

characters in tag number.

4 NUM/

ALPHA

LIN AG NO.DP T

Take SFC keyboard out of alpha

mode and put it into numeric mode.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.3 Entering a Tag Number, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 21 Entering Tag Number, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

5 X

SW VER

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT 3

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT 3Ø

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT 3Ø1

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT 3Ø11

Key in “3011” as numbers in Tag

number.

6 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

LIN AG NO.DP T

INGOR KSFC W ...

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT3Ø11

Message exchange is working.

Loads tag number into transmitter’s

working memory.

Keystroke summary Figure 26 shows keystroke summary for entering tag number for quick

reference.

Figure 26 Keystroke Summary for Entering Tag Number

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

NUM/

ALPHA

Alpha

DE READ

Number

NUM/

ALPHA

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

( analog mode only)

22506

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 73

6.4 Selecting Output Form

Background You can select the transmitter’s output to represent a straight linear

calculation or a square root calculation for flow measurement

applications using a differential pressure type transmitter. Thus, we refer

to the linear or the square root selection as the output conformity or the

output form.

Procedure The procedure in Table 22 shows how to select the desired output

conformity.

ATTENTION If the transmitter is equipped with a local smart meter, you must

reconfigure the smart meter as described in Section 6.11 or 6.12 of this

manual whenever you change the transmitter’s output conformity.

Table 22 Selecting Output Conformity

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 B

CONF

NGO

ITYORM

IST C F

CON F ?

Prompt asks if you want to access

configuration parameter called

conformity. if you want to access it,

go to Step 2. If you do not want to

access it, press [CLR] key to exit

function or [s NEXT] key to call up

next configuration parameter.

2 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

ITYORMCONF

LINEAR

ITYORMCONF

ARE ROSQU OT

Present output conformity is linear.

Present output conformity is square

root.

ITEM

DE CONF

ITYORMCONF

ARE ROSQU OT

ITYORMCONF

LINEAR

Change output conformity to square

root.

Change output conformity to linear.

4 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

ITYORMCONF

RE D I NNTE SEFC

ITYORMCONF

OAD CHWNL NOGEDA?

Conformity change is entered in

SFC.

Prompt asks if you want to

download change to transmitter. If

you want to download change, go to

Step 5. If you do not want to

download change, press [CLR] key to

return to initial prompt in Step 1.

5 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

ITYORMCONF

OR K NGCW .F.S.I

NGO IST C F

ITYORMCONF ?

Message exchange is working.

Output conformity is changed in

transmitter. Press [s NEXT] key to

call up next parameter or [CLR] key

to exit function. Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.4 Selecting Output Form, Continued

Keystroke summary Figure 27 shows keystroke summary for selecting output conformity for

quick reference.

Figure 27 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Output Conformity.

CONF

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

ITEM

DE CONF

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes) 22507

About square root

output For differential pressure transmitters measuring the pressure drop across

a primary element, the flow rate is directly proportional to the square

root of the differential or pressure drop. The ST 3000 transmitter’s

output is automatically converted to equal percent of flow when its

output conformity is configured as square root.

You can use these formulas to manually calculate the percent of flow for

comparison purposes.

ΔP

Span • 100 = % P

Where, ΔP = Differential pressure input in engineering units

Span = Transmitter’s measurement span (URV – LRV)

% P = Pressure input in percent of span

Therefore, %P

100 • 100 = % Flow

And, you can use the following formula to determine the corresponding

current output in milliamperes direct current.

(% Flow • 16) + 4 = mA dc Output

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 75

6.4 Selecting Output Form, Continued

About square root

output, continued Example: If you have a differential pressure transmitter with a range of

0 to 100 inches of water with an input of 49 inches of water,

substituting into the above formulas yields:

100 • 100 = 49%

49%

100 • 100 = 70% Flow, and

70% • 16 + 4 = 15.2 mA dc Output

Square root dropout To avoid unstable output at readings near zero, the ST 3000 transmitter

automatically drops square root conformity and changes to linear

conformity for low differential pressure readings. As shown in Figure

28, the dropout point is between 0.4 and 0.5 % of differential pressure

input depending on direction.

Figure 28 Square Root Dropout Points.

0 0.2 0.4 0.8 10.6 1.2 1.4

Differential Pressure (% Full Scale)

Flow

(% of Span)

0utput

(mA dc)

4.8

5.6

6.4

Dropout Points

22508

Square Root Curve

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.5 Adjusting Damping Time

Background You can adjust the damping time to reduce the output noise. We suggest

that you set the damping to the smallest value that is reasonable for your

process.

ATTENTION The electrical noise effect on the output signal is partially related to the

turndown ratio of the transmitter. As the turndown ratio increases, the

peak-to-peak noise on the output signal increases. You can use this

formula to find the turndown ratio using the range information for your

transmitter.

Turndown Ratio = Upper Range Limit

(Upper Range Value – Lower Range Value)

Example: The turndown ratio for a 400 inH2O transmitter with a range of

0 to 50 inH2O would be:

Turndown Ratio = 400

(50 – 0) = 8

1 or 8:1

Procedure The procedure in Table 23 outlines the keystrokes used to adjust the

damping time to two seconds as an example.

Table 23 Adjusting Damping Time

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 C

DAMP

PT1DAMP

3ECØ.ON

3011

SDS

Present damping time in seconds

PT1DAMP 301 1

OR K NGCW .F.S.I

PT1DAMP

5ECØ.ON

3011

SDS

Message exchange is working.

Next highest damping time value in

seconds.

ATTENTION The [s NEXT] key

raises the setting while the

[t PREV] key lowers the setting. Or,

you can key in a number that will be

converted to closest damping value

listed in Table 20.

3 Repeat Step 2 until display shows

PT1DAMP

ØEC2.ON

3011

SDS

Transmitter’s damping time is now

set to two seconds.

ATTENTION You do not need to

press the [ENTER] key to store the

damping time in the transmitter’s

memory.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 77

6.5 Adjusting Damping Time, Continued

Keystroke summary Figure 29 shows keystroke summary for adjusting damping time for

quick reference.

Figure 29 Keystroke Summary for Adjusting Damping Time

DAMP

Number

22509

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.6 Selecting Unit of Measurement

Background You can choose to have the pressure measurements displayed in one of

the preprogrammed engineering units in the SFC.

Procedure Table 24 lists the pre-programmed units and shows how to select them.

ATTENTION The engineering units shown in Table 23 are only available in an SFC

with software version 3.2 or greater. The selections are similar in other

software versions but without temperature references and minus the

inches of water at 68°F (20°C) engineering units.

Table 24 Pre-Programmed Engineering Units for Selection

IF you want URV, LRV, etc.

displayed in …

THEN sequentially press

UNITS key until

display shows…

inches of water at 39.2°F (4°C)

PT1UN I T

H2O

3011S

_39F

inches of water at 68°F (20°C) PT1UN I T

H2O

3011

_68F

millimeters of mercury at 0°C

(32°F) PT1UN I T

mHg

3011

_ØC

pounds per square inch PT1UN I T

3011

kilopascals PT1UN I T

3011

megapascals PT1UN I T

3011

millibar PT1UN I T

3011

bar PT1UN I T

3011S

grams per square centimeter PT1UN I T

3011S

cm^2

kilograms per square centimeter PT1UN I T

3011S

cm ^ 2K

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 79

6.6 Selecting Unit of Measurement, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 24 Pre-Programmed Engineering Units for Selection, continued

IF you want URV, LRV, etc.

displayed in …

THEN sequentially press

UNITS key until

display shows…

inches of mercury at 32°F (0°C) PT1UN I T

3011S

gi _32F

millimeters of water at 4°C

(39.2°F) PT1UN I T

3011S

2mO

_4C

meters of water at 4°C (39.2°F) PT1UN I T

3011S

2mO

_4C

normal atmoshperes

ATM

1UN TIS PT3

011

inches of water at 60°F (15.6°C) 1UN TIS PT3

011

"2H0O_6F

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.7 Setting Range Values Using SFC

Background You can set the LRV and URV by either keying in the desired values

through the SFC keyboard or applying the corresponding LRV and

URV pressures directly to the transmitter.

ATTENTION • We factory calibrate ST 3000 Smart Transmitters with inches of

water ranges using inches of water pressure referenced to a

temperature of 39.2°F (4°C).

• For a reverse range, enter the upper range value as the LRV and the

lower range value as the URV. For example, to make a 0 to 50 psi

range a reverse range, enter 50 as the LRV and 0 as the URV.

• The URV changes automatically to compensate for any changes in

the LRV and maintain the present span (URV – LRV).

• If you must change both the LRV and URV, always change the LRV

first.

Procedure 1 Table 25 gives the procedure for the range values for a sample 5 to 45

inH2O at 39.2°F (4°C) range.

Table 25 Keying in LRV and URV

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 E

LRV

PTLRV 3Ø111

Ø. ØØØØ "H2O_39F

Present LRV setting. (Pressure for 4

mAdc (0%) output.)

2 5

PTLRV 3Ø111

5_"H2 O

_39F

Key in desired LRV setting. (It is not

necessary to key in a decimal point

and zeros for a whole number.)

3 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

ORK NGCW .F.S.I

PTLRV 3Ø111

5. ØØØØ "H2 O

_39F

Message exchange is working.

New LRV setting stored in

transmitter’s working memory.

4 URV

100%

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

1.Ø5 ØØ "H2 O

_39F

Present URV setting. (Pressure for

20 mAdc (100%) output.)

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 81

6.7 Setting Range Values Using SFC, Continued

Procedure 1,

continued

Table 25 Keying in LRV and URV, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

5 R

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

4_"H2 O

_39F

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

5"H2 O

_39F

Key in 45 as desired URV setting.

6 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

ORK NGCW .F.S.I

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

4.5 ØØØ "H2 O

_39F

Message exchange is working.

New URV setting stored in

transmitter’s working memory.

Keystroke 1 summary Figure 30 shows keystroke summary for keying in LRV and URV for

quick reference.

Figure 30 Keystroke Summary for Keying in LRV and URV.

LRV

Number

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

URV

100%

Number

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes) 22510

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.7 Setting Range Values Using SFC, Continued

Procedure 2 Table 26 gives the procedure for setting range values to sample applied

pressures.

Table 26 Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 Apply known input pressure to

transmitter that represents LRV for 0%

(4 mAdc) output.

2 E

LRV

PTLRV 3Ø111

5. ØØØØ "H2 O

_39F

Present LRV setting. (Pressure for 4

mAdc (0%) output.)

3 SET

PTLRV

3Ø1 1

?SET

Prompt asks if you want to set LRV

to applied pressure. If you don’t

want to set LRV, press [CLR] key to

exit function. Otherwise, go to Step

4 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

ORK NGCW .F.S.I

PTLRV 3Ø111

7. 8377 "H2 O

_39F

Message exchange is working.

Applied LRV setting stored in

transmitter's working memory.

5 Apply known input pressure to

transmitter that represents URV for

100% (20 mAdc) output.

6 URV

100%

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

4.7 837 "H2 O

_39F

Present URV setting. (Pressure for

20 mAdc (100%) output.)

7 SET

PTUR V

3Ø1 1

?SET

Prompt asks if you want to set URV

to applied pressure. If you don’t

want to set URV, press [CLR] key to

exit function. Otherwise, go to Step

8 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

ORK NGCW .F.S.I

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

5.5 482

Message exchange is working.

Applied URV setting stored in

transmitter’s working memory.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 83

6.7 Setting Range Values Using SFC, Continued

Procedure 2,

continued

Table 26 Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

9 ^

SHIFT

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

SH I T– . ..F

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

ORK NGCW .F.S.I

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

NO VO ATLNDA TA ILE

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

TØ11P3

Initiates shift key selection.

Saves data in transmitter’s non-

volatile memory. This takes

approximately 8 seconds.

Keystroke 2 summary Figure 31 shows keystroke summary for setting LRV and URV to

applied pressures for quick reference.

Figure 31 Keystroke Summary for Setting LRV and URV to Applied

Pressures.

LRV

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

URV

100%

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

SET

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

SHIFT 22511

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments

Local zero and span

option ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters are available with optional local zero

and span adjustments. This option is for applications that do not require

an SFC nor digital integration with our TPS system.

About local

adjustments You must apply equivalent zero and span pressures to make the local

zero and span adjustments. This is similar to setting the LRV and URV

to applied pressures using the SFC.

ATTENTION After making any adjustments to the Smart Meter, keep the transmitter

powered for at least 30 seconds so that the new meter configuration is

written to non-volatile memory. If power is turned off before 30

seconds, the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter

power is restored, the meter configuration will revert to the previous

settings.

Procedure The procedure in Table 27 shows the steps for setting the range values

to applied pressures using local zero and span adjustments. See Figure

32 for typical local adjustment connections and setup details.

Table 27 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span

Adjustments

Step Action

1 Turn OFF transmitter power. Loosen end-cap lock and remove end-

cap from terminal block side of electronics housing.

2 Observing polarity, connect a milliammeter across positive (+) and

negative (–) TEST terminals.

ATTENTION If you have the Local Smart Meter with Zero and

Span adjustment option, you may use the Local Smart Meter in place

of the milliammeter.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 85

6.8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments,

Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 27 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span

Adjustments, continued

Step Action

3 Loosen end-cap lock and remove end-cap from PWA side of

electronics housing to expose Local Zero and Span assembly or

Local Smart meter with Zero and Span adjustments.

Example – Local Zero and Span Assembly.

SPAN

ZERO

Example –Local Smart Meter with Zero and Span adjustments.

1000

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

SPAN

ZERO

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments,

Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 27 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span

Adjustments, continued

Step Action

4 Turn ON transmitter power and let it warm up for a few minutes.

Using an accurate pressure source, apply desired zero equivalent

pressure to transmitter.

ATTENTION For differential pressure transmitters, apply pressure

to the high pressure head for positive range values or vent both

heads to atmosphere for zero. If zero is to equal a negative value,

apply the equivalent pressure to the low pressure head. For

example, if zero is to equal –10 inH2O, you would apply 10 inH2O to

the low pressure head and vent the high pressure head for the zero

adjustment.

5 Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA.

If reading … Then…

is less or greater than 4 mA go to Step 6.

is correct go to Step 7.

ATTENTION If you have the Local Smart Meter with Zero and

Span adjustment option, you may substitute the Local Smart Meter

readings for the milliammeter readings. For example, with zero input

pressure applied assume that the meter reads 4 inH2O instead of 0

inH2O. In this case, the meter reading is greater than 0 (or 4 mA).

Example – Local Smart Meter displaying transmitter output in inches

of water.

1000

ANALOG In H O

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

SPAN

ZERO

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 87

6.8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments,

Continued

Procedure, continued Table 27 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span

Adjustments, continued

Step Action

6 a. Press and hold ZERO button on Local Zero and Span assembly

or Local Smart Meter.

1000

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

SPAN

ZERO

Press &

Hold

ANALOG

ATTENTION The Local Smart Meter readings revert to the default

unit of percent (%) during this operation. If the error code Er0

appears on the display, you are working with a model STD110

transmitter that does not support the Local Zero and Span

adjustments.

b. Press Decrease τ button once to complete this function.

ATTENTION The Local Smart Meter display goes blank for a 1/2

second and then returns reading 0%.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

SPAN

ZERO

Press once

Display goes

blank for 1/2

second and

returns with

zero reading

c. Check that milliammeter reading equals 4 mA and release ZERO

button.

ATTENTION If milliammeter reading doesn’t change, be sure you

are not working with a model STD110 transmitter that ignores local

adjustments. The Local Smart Meter readings return to the set

engineering units after you release the ZERO button.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments,

Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 27 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span

Adjustments, continued

Step Action

7 Using an accurate pressure source, apply pressure equivalent to

desired upper range value to transmitter.

ATTENTION For differential pressure transmitters, apply pressure

to the high pressure head and be sure that the pressure to the low

pressure head is at its reference value.

8 Check that milliammeter reading is 20 mA.

If reading … Then…

is not exactly 20 mA go to Step 9.

is correct go to Step 10.

ATTENTION If you have the Local Smart Meter with Zero and

Span adjustment option, you may substitute the Local Smart Meter

readings for the milliammeter readings. For example, with URV input

pressure applied assume that the meter reads 396 inH2O instead of

400 inH2O. In this case, the meter reading is less than 100% (or 20

mA).

Example – Local Smart Meter displaying transmitter output in inches

of water.

100

ANALOG In H O

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

SPAN

ZERO

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 89

6.8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments,

Continued

Procedure, continued Table 27 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span

Adjustments, continued

Step Action

9 a. Press and hold SPAN button on Local Zero and Span assembly or

Local Smart Meter.

1000

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

SPAN

ZERO

Press &

Hold

ANALOG

ATTENTION The Local Smart Meter readings revert to the default

unit of percent (%) during this operation. If the error code Er0

appears on the display, you are working with a model STD110

transmitter that does not support the Local Zero and Span

adjustments. If the error code Er4 appears, you are trying to set a

SPAN value that is outside acceptable limits for your transmitter.

Readjust applied pressure to be within acceptable range limits and

repeat this procedure.

b. Press Increase σ button once to complete this function.

ATTENTION The Local Smart Meter display goes blank for a 1/2

second and then returns reading 100%.

1000

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

SPAN

ZERO

Press once

ANALOG

Display goes

blank for 1/2

second and

returns with

100% reading

c. Check that milliammeter reading equals 20 mA and release SPAN

button.

ATTENTION If milliammeter reading doesn’t change, be sure you

are not working with a model STD110 transmitter that ignores local

adjustments. The Local Smart Meter readings return to the set

engineering units after you release the SPAN button.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments,

Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 27 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span

Adjustments, continued

Step Action

10 Wait 30 seconds so that changes have been copied to the

transmitter’s non-volatile memory.

Remove applied pressure and turn OFF transmitter power.

12 Replace end-cap on PWA side of electronics housing and tighten

lock.

13 Remove milliammeter from TEST terminals and replace end-cap and

tighten lock.

14 Turn ON transmitter power and check Local Smart Meter reading, if

applicable.

Figure 32 Typical Setup for Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments.

Field

Terminals

- SIGNAL +

+ -

TEST

Power

Supply

Receiver

ST 3000

250

STR3015

Milliammeter

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 91

6.9 Selecting Output Signal Mode (DE Mode Only)

DE configuration

parameters You must configure these additional parameters for a transmitter in the

DE mode of operation.

• Mode of Output Signal Indication

• Message Format

This section and the next section cover how to configure these

parameters individually. However, once you enter the DE configuration

function, you can access all DE configuration parameters serially

without exiting the function. Just use the [s NEXT ] and [t PREV] keys to

step through the parameter selections.

Background You can select the output signal mode for digital transmission to be one

of these three modes as described in Table 20.

• Single Range

• Dual Range (STDC)

• Single Range W/SV

Procedure The procedure in Table 28 outlines the steps for selecting a Single

Range W/SV mode for example purposes only.

Table 28 Selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 ^

SHIFT

DE CONF

ITEM

LIN DP

FT–SHI

TØ11P3

ORK NGCW .F.S.I

PTDE 3011OCNF

eRngnliSea

PTDE 3011OCNF

Initiate shift key selection.

Calls up DE CONFIG menu. Output

signal mode selection appears.

2 DE CONF

ITEM

DE CONF

ITEM

eRgnliSn

PTDE 3011OCNF

gw/SV

RngauDea

PTDE 3011OCNF

ST DC)

Calls up next output signal mode

selection.

Repeatedly press [MENU ITEM] key to

step through all output signal mode

selections listed in Table 20 in

sequence. Stop when “Single Range

W/SV” mode is on display.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.9 Selecting Output Signal Mode (DE Mode Only), Continued

Procedure , continued

Table 28 Selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

3 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

RD INEE

PTDE 3011OCNF

TSFCEN

4BoB/

PTDE 3011OCNF

)( ywt

Enters change in SFC and calls up

next DE configuration parameter.

This action only applies if selection

is changed. Otherwise, must press

[CLR] key to exit function or [s NEXT]

key to call up next parameter.

4 CLR

(NO) DCWLO

PTDE 3011OCNF

NNGAHDAOE?

Prompt asks if change entered in

SFC is to be downloaded to

transmitter. If you want to download

change, go to Step 5. If you do not

want to download change, press

[CLR] key to exit function. This action

only applies when Step 3 is valid.

Otherwise, this keystroke exits DE

CONF function.

5 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTDE 3011OCNF

OR K NGCW .F.S.I

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

TØ11P3

Message exchange is working.

Parameter change is loaded in

transmitter. SFC is ready for next

function.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 93

6.9 Selecting Output Signal Mode (DE Mode Only), Continued

Keystroke summary Figure 33 shows keystroke summary for selecting the mode of output

signal indication for transmitter in DE mode for quick reference.

Figure 33 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Mode of Output Signal

Indication.

SHIFT MENU

ITEM

DE CONF

ITEM

DE CONF

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

CLR

(No)

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes) 22513

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.10 Selecting Message Format (DE Mode Only)

Background You can select one of these broadcast formats for the digital signal

transmission as described in Table 20.

• 4-Byte type

• 6-Byte type

Procedure The procedure in Table 29 outlines the steps for selecting a 6-Byte type

format for example purposes only.

Table 29 Selecting Message Format

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 ^

SHIFT

DE CONF

ITEM

LIN DP

FT–SHI

TØ11P3

ORK NGCW .F.S.I

PTDE 3011OCNF

eRgnliSn

PTDE 3011OCNF

gw/SV

Initiate shift key selection.

Calls up DE CONFIG menu. Output

signal mode selection appears.

4BoB/

PTDE 3011OCNF

)( ywt

Calls up next DE CONFIG menu

item - Message format selection

appears.

3 DE CONF

ITEM

6B/Bw

PTDE 3011OCNF

)( yt

Calls up next message format

selection. Repeatedly press [MENU

ITEM] key to cycle between two

format selections. See Table 19 for

details. Stop when “w/DB (6 Byte)”

selection is on display.

4 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes) RD INEE

PTDE 3011OCNF

TSFCEN

/S=/

PTDE 3011OCNF

BLoFO

Enters change in SFC and calls up

next DE configuration parameter.

This action only applies if selection

is changed. Otherwise, must press

[CLR] key to exit function, [s NEXT]

key to call up next parameter, or

[t PREV] key to call up previous

parameter.

5 CLR

(NO) DCWLO

PTDE 3011OCNF

NNGAHDAOE?

Prompt asks if change entered in

SFC is to be downloaded to

transmitter. If you want to download

change, go to Step 6. If you do not

want to download change, press

[CLR] key to exit function. This action

only applies when Step 4 is valid.

Otherwise, this keystroke exits DE

CONF function.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 95

6.10 Selecting Message Format (DE Mode Only), Continued

Procedure , continued

Table 29 Selecting Message Format, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

6 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTDE 3011OCNF

OR K NGCW .F.S.I

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

TØ11P3

Message exchange is working.

Parameter change is loaded in

transmitter. SFC is ready for next

function.

Keystroke summary Figure 34 shows keystroke summary for selecting the message format for

transmitter in DE mode for quick reference.

Figure 34 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Message Format.

SHIFT MENU

ITEM

DE CONF

ITEM

DE CONF

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

CLR

(No)

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

22514

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC

Background You can select an available engineering unit or enter a custom one

including upper and lower limit settings for the Local Smart Meter’s

digital readout through the SFC.

Configuring the Smart

Meter • If you initiate an SFC command at the same time a button is pressed

on the Local Smart Meter, the Local Smart Meter will respond to the

command it receives last. In other words, the last command wins.

• The Local Smart Meter does not have to be installed for you to

configure it through the SFC. The meter’s configuration data is stored

in memory on the transmitter’s PWA rather than in the meter itself.

Transmitter Output

Conformity and Smart

Meter Configuration

Normally when using a differential type transmitter, you can select the

transmitter’s output to represent a straight linear calculation or a square

root calculation for flow measurement applications. This linear or

square root output parameter selection is called output conformity or

output form. (See Subsection 6.4 for more details.)

When configuring the smart meter to display the transmitter output

measurement, there are certain rules to keep in mind which are

dependent on the output conformity selection. These rules are described

in the following paragraphs.

1. The output conformity setting of the transmitter restricts the

engineering units you can select for the smart meter display.

• When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of

LINEAR, you can select only pressure type engineering units.

(See Table 31.)

• When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of

SQUARE ROOT, you can select only flow type engineering

units GPM and GPH.

• The percent and custom engineering units can be selected

regardless of output conformity configuration.

2. Additionally, the output conformity setting restricts the setting of the

lower and upper display limits to represent transmitter’s 0 to 100%

output.

• If you select pressure type engineering units, you cannot set the

lower or upper display limits. These values are automatically set

when you select the engineering units.

• You can set only the upper display limit when the transmitter is

configured for SQUARE ROOT output conformity. The lower

display limit is fixed at zero (0) for a transmitter in square root

mode and cannot be changed.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 97

6.11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC, Continued

Transmitter Output

Conformity and Smart

Meter Configuration,

continued

• You can set both the lower and upper display limits when you

have selected custom engineering units (Custom) and the

transmitter output conformity is set to LINEAR.

When setting the lower and upper display limits, if you let either

the lower or upper display limit setting time out (after thirty

seconds), the meter will discard the newly set values and will

revert to its previous settings. The meter forces you to set both

limits by automatically initiating the next limit setting, either

lower or upper, depending upon which limit you set first.

3. If you change the transmitter’s output conformity, you must

reconfigure the local smart meter as outlined in Table 30.

ATTENTION After making any adjustments to the smart meter, keep the transmitter

powered for at least 30 seconds so that the new meter configuration is

written to non-volatile memory. If power is turned off before 30

seconds, the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter

power is restored, the meter configuration will revert to the previous

settings.

Procedure The procedure in Table 30 outlines the steps for setting up the

configuration for a Local Smart Meter using an SFC.

Table 30 Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 CONF

CONF I G

MON TFR IC?OY

Calls up first configuration prompt.

CONF I G

CMe ntr o ?ef

Calls up next configuration prompt.

Prompt asks if you want to access

meter configuration function. If you

want to access it, go to Step 3. If

you do not want to access it, press

[CLR] key to exit function or [s NEXT]

key to call up next configuration

parameter.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6.11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 30 Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

ENTER

(YES)

NON-VOL

SCFO

WRK NI.G..

CMe ntr oef

Pertsen

Met re

CMe ntr oef

Enters meter configuration function

and confirms that Local Smart Meter

is present. Timed prompt - Proceed

to Step 4.

ATTENTION If prompt “No Meter

Present” appears, prompt times out

in a few seconds, as described

above, and calls up the Configure

Meter? prompt. This means that

you can access the meter

configuration function without the

Local Smart Meter installed.

Proceed to Step 4. If prompt “Mtr

not Supportd” appears, prompt

times out and returns to previous ST

CONFIG prompt (See Step 2.). This

means that you are working with a

pre-release 300 transmitter that

does not support the Local Smart

Meter option and, therefore, can not

access the meter configuration

function.

Cnoufig Me t re

CMe ntr oef

re ?

Prompt asks if you want to configure

Local Smart Meter. If you want to

configure it, go to Step 5. If you do

not want to configure it, press [CLR]

key to exit function.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 99

6.11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 30 Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

ENTER

(YES)

NON-VOL

ITEM

DECONF

"2H9O_3

EMe gtr neU

MmHg_0C

PSI

KPa

MPa

mBAR

BAR

g/cm^2

Kg/cm^2

mmH2O_4C

inHg_32F

mH2O_4C

GPM

GPH

Custom

Calls up present meter Engineering

Unit selection. (Note that unit

“H2O_39F is shown for example

purposes only.)

Repeatedly press [MENU ITEM] key to

step through other selections. For

example purposes, stop when PSI

unit is on display.

If EU is … Then…

Custom, GPM, go to Step 7.

or GPH

other than go to Step 13.

Custom, GPM,

or GPH

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

100

6.11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 30 Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

ENTER

(YES)

NON-VOL

SCFO

EMe gtr neU

KNI.G..

Dtao

EMe gtr neU

ni ts

wn oleadd

SCFO

i-oLgnU

KNI.G..

R>N

EHi CUu

Selected engineering unit is

downloaded to transmitter and

high/low display limit setting function

is initiated. (Note that Custom unit is

shown for example purposes only.)

ATTENTION If you select GPM

or GPH unit with the transmitter in its

LINEAR mode, the prompts

“INVALID REQUEST”, “Download

Error”, and “MtrNotInFlowMode” are

sequentially displayed after the SFC

WORKING. . . prompt and display

returns to the Configure Meter

prompt. Transmitter must be in its

SQUARE ROOT (Flow) mode for

GPM or GPH to be a valid unit

selection.

Press [τ PREV] key , if you want to

view present high and low display

limits loaded in the transmitter.

8 5S

EHi CUu

stom

iCUu

stom

EHi CUu

stom

Key in 525 as upper display limit for

Custom unit.

ATTENTION The display range

of the meter is ±19,990,000. If you

enter larger values, they will not be

displayed.

ENTER

(YES)

NON-VOL

EHi CUu

stom

ETNR

EED NIFCS

R>N

ELo CUu

Enters upper display limit in SFC

and calls up lower display limit

setting.

10 +_

ELo CUu

stom

ELo CUu

stom

Key in –5 as lower display limit for

Custom unit in transmitter

configured for LINEAR output mode.

(Note that lower limit value is

referenced to configured LRV.)

ATTENTION Zero (0) is only

valid entry for GPM or GPH unit, or

CUSTOM unit with transmitter in

SQUARE ROOT output mode.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 101

6.11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 30 Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

ENTER

(YES)

NON-VOL

ELo CUu

stom

ETNR

EED NIFCS

ETNR

EHi-oLgnU

ni ts

CH NASG?E

Enters lower display limit in SFC

and prompt asks if you want to enter

changes in transmitter. If you want

to enter changes, go to Step 12. If

you do not want to enter changes,

press [CLR] key to exit function.

ENTER

(YES)

NON-VOL

SCFO

i-oLgnU

KNI.G..

Dtao

Dwn oleadd

EHi-oLgnU

ni ts

Cnoufig Met re

CMe ntr oef

re ?

Downloads changes to transmitter

and returns to Configure Meter?

prompt. Press [CLR] key to return to

ST CONFIG menu. Skip Step 13.

ENTER

(YES)

NON-VOL

SCFO

EMe gtr neU

KNI.G..

Dtao

EMe gtr neU

ni ts

wn oleadd

MrtI

EMe gtr neU

FolowdM

No e

Cnoufig Met re

CMe ntr oef

re ?

Downloads selected pressure

engineering unit to transmitter.

Press [CLR] key to return to ST

CONFIG menu.

ATTENTION If you select a

pressure unit with the transmitter in

its SQUARE ROOT (Flow) mode,

the prompts “INVALID REQUEST”

and “Download Error” are

sequentially displayed after the SFC

WORKING. . . prompt and the EU Hi

prompt is called up for display. At

this point, you can change the upper

display limit as shown in Step 8 or

press the [σ NEXT] key to call up the

EU Lo prompt. See Step 10 to

change the lower display limit or

press the [σ NEXT] key and then the

[CLR] key to exit the function.

14 If you selected one of these engineering

units: %,

inH2O,

mmHg,

PSI,

GPM, or

GPH;

verify that corresponding unit indicator is

lit on Local Smart Meter display.

If selected engineering unit does not

match one of six unit indicators on

meter, you can use a stick-on label

from Honeywell drawing 30756918-

001. Just peel off matching

engineering unit label from drawing

and carefully paste it in lower right

hand corner of display.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

102

6.11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC, Continued

Keystroke summary Figure 35 shows the keystroke summary for configuring the Local Smart

Meter using the SFC for quick reference.

Figure 35 Keystroke Summary for Configuring Local Smart Meter.

CONF

ENTER

(YES)

NON-VOL

Meter Not

Supported

ENTER

(YES)

NON-VOL

ITEM

DECONF

ENTER

(YES)

NON-VOL

Number

ENTER

(YES)

NON-VOL

Number

ENTER

(YES)

NON-VOL

ENTER

(YES)

NON-VOL

CLR

(NO)

Custom, GPM,

or GPH unit only Hi Limit

Lo Limit

ENTER

(YES)

NON-VOL

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 103

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Background The local smart meter can be set to show the PV out in engineering units

that are appropriate for your process application. You can select an

available engineering unit or enter a custom one including upper and

lower display limit settings for the local smart meter’s digital readout

using buttons on the face of the meter.

Using the Smart

Meter Follow these guidelines when configuring the local smart meter:

• If you initiate an SFC command at the same time a button is pressed

on the local smart meter, the local smart meter will respond to the

command it receives last. In other words, the last command wins.

• In most cases, you can press and release a button for one-shot

operation, or press and hold a button for continuous, 1/2 second,

repetitive operation.

• Active setup field will begin to flash at one second rate if next action

is not initiated within one second. And, if no action is taken within

30 seconds, the setup function will time out and the meter will return

to its previous state.

Table 31 shows an illustration of the local smart meter and a description

of the pushbuttons on the meter face.

Table 31 Smart Meter Pushbutton Description

Smart Meter Pushbuttons Pushbutton Function

VAR SEL. Not functional when installed with

ST 3000 transmitters.

SPAN Selects Span range setting (URV).

ZERO Selects Zero range setting (LRV).

UPPER VALUE Selects Upper Range Value setting

(URV).

UNITS SET Selects engineering units for meter

display.

LOWER VALUE Selects Lower Range Value (LRV).

τ Decrease pushbutton

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

18.808

ANALOG In H O

KGPH mmHg

GPM PSI A

OUTPUT MODE

CHECK STATUS

FAULT - LAST

KNOWN VALUE

FLOW

oFoC

VAR

SEL.

SPAN

ZERO

σ Increase pushbutton

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

104

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Transmitter Output

Conformity and Smart

Meter Configuration

Normally when using a differential type transmitter, you can select the

transmitter’s output to represent a straight linear calculation or a square

root calculation for flow measurement applications. This linear or

square root output parameter selection is called output conformity or

output form. (See Subsection 6.4 for more details.)

When configuring the smart meter to display the transmitter output

measurement, there are certain rules to keep in mind which are

dependent on the output conformity selection. These rules are described

in the following paragraphs.

1. The output conformity setting of the transmitter restricts the

engineering units you can select for the smart meter display.

• When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of

LINEAR, you can select only pressure type engineering units.

(See Table 32.)

• When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of

SQUARE ROOT, you can select only flow type engineering

units GPM and GPH.

• The percent and custom engineering units can be selected

regardless of output conformity configuration.

2. Additionally, the output conformity setting restricts the setting of the

lower and upper display limits to represent transmitter’s 0 to 100%

output.

• If you select pressure type engineering units, you cannot set the

lower or upper display limits. These values are automatically set

when you select the engineering units.

• You can set only the upper display limit when the transmitter is

configured for SQUARE ROOT output conformity. The lower

display limit is fixed at zero (0) for a transmitter in square root

mode and cannot be changed.

• You can set both the lower and upper display limits when you

have selected custom engineering units (EUF) and the

transmitter output conformity is set to LINEAR.

When setting the lower and upper display limits, if you let either the

lower or upper display limit setting time out (after thirty seconds), the

meter will discard the newly set values and will revert to its previous

settings. The meter forces you to set both limits by automatically

initiating the next limit setting, either lower or upper, depending upon

which limit you set first.

3. If you change the transmitter’s output conformity, you must

reconfigure the Local Smart meter as outlined in Tables 33 to 36.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 105

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Transmitter Output

Conformity and Smart

Meter Configuration,

continued

Table 32 Smart Meter Engineering Units Code

Smart Meter Code Engineering Unit Transmitter Output

Conformity

EU0

% * Linear or Square Root

EU1

in H2O *

EU2 mmHg *

EU3 PSI *

EU4 kPa †

EU5 MPa †

EU6 mbar † Linear

EU7 bar †

EU8 g/cm2 †

EU9 kg/cm2 †

EUA mmH2O †

EUB inHg †

EUC mH2O †

EUD GPM * Square Root

EUE GPH * Square Root

EUF Custom † Linear or Square Root

* These selections have indicators on smart meter display.

† Use stick-on labels provided for other engineering units.

Selecting Engineering

Units The procedure in Table 33 outlines the steps for selecting the desired

engineering units for a Local Smart Meter using its local adjustments on

the face of the meter. You will be selecting the unit of measurement

that you want the smart meter to indicate during normal operation.

WARNING When the transmitter’s end-cap is removed, the housing is not

explosionproof.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

106

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Selecting Engineering

Units, continued

Table 33 Selecting Engineering Units

Step Action Meter Display

1 Loosen lock on meter end-cap and unscrew

cap from housing. Be sure transmitter power

is ON.

Typical display for meter in transmitter that

has no previous meter configuration stored in

its memory.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

Appears when

transmitter is in

its Analog mode.

2 Press UNITS SET button. Display shows code for current engineering

units setting.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 107

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Selecting Engineering

Units, continued

Table 33 Selecting Engineering Units, continued

Step Action Meter Display

3 Press Increase σ key to call up next code or

Decrease τ button call up previous code.

Repeat this action until desired code is on

display.

You can hold down the Increase or Decrease

key to scroll forward or backward through the

codes.

ATTENTION Remember that if transmitter

is configured for SQUARE ROOT output

conformity the only valid code selections are

EU0 (%)

EUD (GPM)

EUE (GPH)

EUF (Custom)

If transmitter is configured for LINEAR output

conformity EU0 (%) to EUC and EUF

(CUSTOM) are valid code selections.

Selection codes for engineering units

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

In H O

EU0 = %*

EU1 = inH2O*

EU2 = mmHg*

EU3 = PSI*

EU4 = KPa

EU5 = MPa

EU6 = mbar

EU7 = bar

EU8 = g/cm2

EU9 = Kg/cm2

EUA = mmH2O

EUB = inHg

EUC = mH2O

EUD = GPM*

EUE = GPH*

EUF = Custom

Press and hold to

scroll forward

through selections

Press and hold to

scroll backward

through selections

*These selections

have indicators on

the display.

4 Press UNITS SET button to lock in selected

code.

ATTENTION If you select an invalid code

according to the selections in Step 3, the

meter display will show an error code Er1 for

one second and then return to the previous

engineering units selection.

Goes blank for 1/2 second and returns with

reading in engineering units

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

In H O

Digital reading now

in engineering units

of inches of water

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

108

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Selecting Engineering

Units, continued

Table 33 Selecting Engineering Units, continued

Step Action Meter Display

5 If selected engineering unit does not match

one of six unit indicators on meter, peel off

matching stick-on unit label from sheet

(drawing number 30756918-001) and paste it

in lower right hand corner of meter.

Use stick-on label for engineering units

without indicators on display.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

Kg/cm2

Stick-on label

identifies selected

engineering units

6 If you selected Custom or Flow engineering

units, go to Tables 35 and 36 to set lower and

upper display limits for smart meter display.

Lower and upper display limits have not been

set for Custom or Flow engineering units.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

FLOW

GPM

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 109

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Setting Lower and

Upper Display Values The Table 34 shows the restrictions on setting the display values for

given engineering units and output conformity selections.

Table 34 Smart Meter Restrictions for Setting Display Values

Engineering Output Set

Units code Conformity Lower Display Value? Upper Display Value?

EU0 through EUC

(Pressure type units)

Linear No (set automatically) No (set automatically)

EU0, EUD, EUE,and EUF

(%, GPM, GPH, or Custom)

Square root No (fixed at zero) Yes

Use Table 36

EUF

(Custom)

Linear Yes

Use Table 35

Yes

Use Table 36

Setting Lower and

Upper Display Values To set the lower and upper display limit values for the meter display

perform the procedures in Tables 35 and 36. Also note that in each

procedure you must:

• First set the magnitude range for each display value. This enables

the multiplier (K) on the display for indicating larger ranges (greater

than 19999 and shifts the decimal point of the digital display left or

right depending on the precision you want to show for that value).

• Next set the display value. This procedure sets the display limit of

the meter to represent minimum and maximim transmitter output

(0% and 100 % output).

Note: Magnitude range and display values are set for both upper and

lower (if applicable) display limits.

During normal operation, the display range of the meter digital readout

is ±19,990,000 and is automatically ranged to provide the best precision

possible for the digits available up to 1/100th of a unit.

Setting Lower Display

Values The procedure in Table 35 outlines the steps for setting the lower

display limit to represent the 0 percent (LRV) output of the transmitter.

ATTENTION For example purposes, the procedures in Tables 35 and 36 assume that

the lower value is to be set at 0 and the upper value is to be set at

19,990,000 for a CUSTOM unit in a transmitter with a LINEAR output,

and the transmitter’s present output is exactly 50 percent.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

110

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Setting Lower Display

Values, continued

Table 35 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display

Step Action Meter Display

1 You have completed units selection in Table

33 and U-L appears on the display. Press

LOWER VALUE button to initiate lower

display limit setting function.

ATTENTION This procedure is only

applicable for Custom (EUF) engineering unit

selection in a transmitter configured for

LINEAR output conformity.

The lower display value for transmitters

configured for SQUARE ROOT output

conformity is fixed at zero (0.00) and cannot

be changed.

If lower limit display value was previously set,

KNOWN VALUE indicator lights and set value

flashes in display.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

0. 00

Previously set

value flashes in

display and

indicator lights

KNOWN VALUE

2 Press LOWER VALUE button again within 5

seconds. Otherwise, meter exits limit setting

function.

Display shows magnitude range selection.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

19 .99

ATTENTION The magnitude range

selection only applies for setting the display

limits. This selection does not affect the

normal operation of the meter. During normal

operation, the display is automatically ranged

to provide the best precision possible.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 111

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Setting Lower Display

Values, continued

Table 35 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display, continued

Step Action Meter Display

3 Press Increase σ button to call up next

available magnitude range selection or

Decrease τ button to call up previous

magnitude range selection.

NOTE: This action enables the multiplier (K)

for indicating larger ranges and shifts

the decimal point of the digital display

left or right depending on which button

is pushed. The display shows largest

positive number for given range

selection so you can select a range

that is just larger than the range to be

set for best display precision. Hold

respective key to scroll forward or

backward through the selections.

Repeat this action until desired selection is on

display.

Magnitude range selections.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

19 . 99

19.99

199.9

1999

19.99K*

199.9K*

1999K*

19990K*

Press and hold to

scroll forward

through selections

Press and hold to

scroll backward

through selections

*The "K" multiplier

indicator appears

below the digital

reading on the display.

4 Press LOWER VALUE button to initiate lower

value setting. Readout goes blank except for first active digit

which will be 0 unless lower value was set

before.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

112

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Setting Lower Display

Values, continued

Table 35 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display, continued

Step Action Meter Display

Press Increase σ button to select the next

available digit value or Decrease τ button to

select the previous digit value.

Repeat this action until desired value is on

display.

Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in first

digit and activate next active digit.

Readout now displays next active digit which

will be zero unless lower value was set

before.

Press Increase σ button to select the next

available digit value or Decrease τ button to

select the previous digit value.

Repeat this action until desired value is on

display.

Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in

second digit and activate next active digit.

Readout now displays next active digit which

will be zero unless lower value was set

before.

First digit value setting.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

Press and hold to

scroll forward

through values

Press and hold to

scroll backward

through values

9 Press Increase σ button to select the next

available digit value or Decrease τ button to

select the previous digit value.

Repeat this action until desired value is on

display.

Third digit value setting.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

000.

Press and hold to

scroll forward

through values

Press and hold to

scroll backward

through values

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 113

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Setting Lower Display

Values, continued

Table 35 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display, continued

Step Action Meter Display

10 Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in third

digit and activate next active digit.

Readout now displays next active digit which

will be BLANK unless lower value was set to 1

before.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

000.

"1" digit is

BLANK or 1

Press Increase σ button to set digit to 1 or

Decrease τ button to set it to BLANK.

12 Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in “1”

digit and activate sign segment.

Readout now displays sign segment which

will be BLANK for positive values unless lower

value was set for negative (–) values before.

“1” digit value setting.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

000.

Press to set "1"

digit as 1

Press to set "1"

digit as BLANK

Press Increase σ button to set sign segment

to minus sign for negative values or Decrease

τ button to set it to BLANK for positive values.

14 Press LOWER VALUE button to lock in

current settings as lower display value limit.

ATTENTION For CUSTOM unit in

transmitter with LINEAR output, you must set

both lower and upper display limits for values

to take effect. If you let either the lower or

upper display limit time out (after 30 seconds),

the meter discards both newly set values and

reverts back to the previously set values.

Sign segment setting.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

000.

Press to set sign

segment as minus

sign (-) for negative

values

Press to set sign

segment as

BLANK for

positive values

• If you have not yet set the upper display limit value, the meter automatically enters the upper display

setting function after it displays previously set value, if applicable. Go to Table 36.

• If you have already set the upper display limit value, this completes the lower and upper display

limits setting function for Custom engineering units in the transmitter. Meter returns to normal

operation.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

114

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Setting Upper Display

Values The procedure in Table 36 outlines the steps for setting the upper

display limit to represent the 100 percent (URV) output of the

transmitter.

ATTENTION This procedure applies only for Flow units (GPM or GPH) in a

transmitter configured for SQUARE ROOT output conformity, or

CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for linear or square root

output conformity.

Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display

Step Action Meter Display

1 Press UPPER VALUE button to initiate upper

display limit setting function. If upper limit display value was previously set,

KNOWN VALUE indicator lights and set value

flashes in display.

2 Press UPPER VALUE button again within 5

seconds. Otherwise, meter exits limit setting

function.

Display shows magnitude range selection.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

19 .99

ATTENTION The magnitude range

selection only applies for setting the display

limits. This selection does not affect the

normal operation of the meter. During normal

operation, the display is automatically ranged

to provide the best precision possible.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 115

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Setting Upper Display

Values, continued

Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display, continued

Step Action Meter Display

3 Press Increase σ button to call up next

available magnitude range selection or

Decrease τ button to call up previous

magnitude range selection.

NOTE: This action enables the multiplier (K)

for indicating larger ranges and shifts

the decimal point of the digital display

left or right depending on which button

is pushed. The display shows largest

positive number for given range

selection so you can select a range

that is just larger than the range to be

set for best display precision. Hold

respective key to scroll forward or

backward through the selections.

Repeat this action until desired selection is on

display. For example purposes only, largest

range 19990K is selected in this procedure.

Magnitude range selections with largest range

selected.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

19.99

199.9

1999

19.99K*

199.9K*

1999K*

19990K*

Press and hold to

scroll forward

through selections

Press and hold to

scroll backward

through selections

*The "K" multiplier

indicator appears

below the digital

reading on the display.

19 990

4 Press UPPER VALUE button to initiate upper

value setting. Readout goes blank except for first active digit

which will be 0 unless upper value was set

before.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

116

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Setting Upper Display

Values, continued

Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display, continued

Step Action Meter Display

5 Press Increase σ button to select the next

available digit value or Decrease τ button to

select the previous digit value.

Repeat this action until desired value is on

display – use 9 for example purposes.

First digit value setting is set to 9.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

Press and hold to

scroll forward

through values

Press and hold to

scroll backward

through values

Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in first

digit and activate next active digit.

Readout now displays next active digit which

will be zero unless upper value was set

before.

7 Press Increase σ button to select the next

available digit value or Decrease τ button to

select the previous digit value.

Repeat this action until desired value is on

display – use 9 for example purposes.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

090

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 117

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Setting Upper Display

Values, continued

Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display, continued

Step Action Meter Display

8 Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in

second digit and activate next active digit.

Readout now displays next active digit which

will be zero unless upper value was set

before.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

0990

Press Increase σ button to select the next

available digit value or Decrease τ button to

select the previous digit value.

Repeat this action until desired value is on

display – use 9 for example purposes.

10 Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in third

digit and activate next active digit.

Readout now displays next active digit which

will be BLANK unless upper value was set to

1 before.

Next digit value setting is set to 9.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

9990

Press and hold to

scroll forward

through values

Press and hold to

scroll backward

through values

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

118

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Setting Upper Display

Values, continued

Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display, continued

Step Action Meter Display

11 Press Increase σ button to set digit to 1 or

Decrease τ button to set it to BLANK. “1” digit value setting is set to 1.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

9990

Press to set "1"

digit as 1

Press to set "1"

digit as BLANK

Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in “1”

digit and activate sign segment.

13 Press Increase σ button to set sign segment

to minus sign for negative values or Decrease

τ button to set it to BLANK. for positive values.

Readout now displays sign segment which

will be BLANK for positive values unless

upper value was set for negative (–) values

before.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

99901

Sign segment

is BLANK for

positive values

and minus sign

for negative

values

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 119

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Setting Upper Display

Values, continued

Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display, continued

Step Action Meter Display

14 Press UPPER VALUE button to lock in

current settings as upper display value and

return to previous display. Upper display limit

setting is now complete.

ATTENTION For CUSTOM unit in

transmitter with LINEAR output, you must set

both lower and upper display limits for values

to take effect. If you let either the lower or

upper display limit time out (after 30 seconds),

the meter discards both newly set values and

reverts back to the previously set values.

Display goes blank for a 1/2 second and

returns to display readout equal to 50%

output.

In this example, readout is 9, 990,000

CUSTOM unit for 50% display range of 0 to

19,990,000 CUSTOM for transmitter with

LINEAR output.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

9990

• If you have not yet set the lower display limit value for CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for

LINEAR output mode, the meter automatically enters the lower display setting function after it

displays previously set value, if applicable. Go to Table 35, Step 3.

• If you have already set the lower display limit value, this completes the lower and upper display limits

setting function for CUSTOM unit in transmitter configured for LINEAR output mode. Meter returns to

normal operation as shown in example display below.

• If you have just set the upper display limit for Flow unit or CUSTOM unit in transmitter configured for

SQUARE ROOT output mode, this completes the limit setting function. Meter returns to normal

operation as shown in example display below.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

120

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Button Pushing

Summary Figure 36 shows button pushing summary for the smart meter display to

select the engineering units.

Figure 36 Button Pushing Summary for Selecting Engineering Units.

Units

Set

Select Unit: EU0 = %

EU1 = inH

EU2 = mmHg

EU3 = PSI

EU4 = KPa

EU5 = MPa

EU6 = mbar

EU7 = bar

EU8 = g/cm

EU9 = Kg/cm

EUA = mmH

EUB = inHg

EUC = mH

EUD = GPM

EUE = GPH

EUF = Custom

EUD, EUE or EUF

selected?

Start

YES

End

Units

Set

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 121

6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued

Button Pushing

Summary Figure 37 shows button pushing summary for the smart meter display to

set the lower and upper display limits.

Figure 37 Button Pushing Summary for Setting Lower and Upper Display Limits.

EUF in

LINEAR

SQUARE ROOT

mode?

EUD or EUE

selected?

YES

LINEAR

Mode

SQUARE ROOT

Mode

Set active digit value 0 to 9

Lower

Value Upper

Value

Set magnitude range: 19.99, 199.9, 1999,

19.99K, 199.9K, 1999K, 19990K

If display limit was previously set, KNOWN VALUE indicator lights

and set value flashes in display.(Note that lower display limit is

fixed at zero (0.00) for units in SQUARE ROOT mode.)

Lower

Value Upper

Value

Set 1 digit to BLANK Set 1 digit to 1

Set sign segment

BLANK for positive

values

Set sign segment

to minus sign (-) for

negative values

Are both lower and

upper display limit

values set?

Yes

Is "1" digit active?

Yes

Set Lower

Range Value

Set Upper

Range Value

Lower

Value Upper

Value

Lower

Value Upper

Value

Lower

Value Upper

Value

Lower

Value Upper

Value

End

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

122

6.13 Disconnecting SFC

Considerations • Be sure a “#” character does not appear on the right side of the SFC

display indicating that the transmitter may be in its current output

mode, or the SFC has detected a non-critical status condition.

– Example:

PTLRV

3011

25 .ØØØØ O

If the # character is on the display, press the [OUTPUT] key and then the

[CLR] key to remove the transmitter from the current output mode, or

press the [STAT] key to check the operating status of the transmitter.

– Example:

INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTOUT 301 11P#

FC WOSING.RK . .

PTOU T

30111

5.ØØØ

CLR

(NO)

PTOUT 301 11P#

FC WOSING.RK . .

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

T 011P3

• Be sure to store all changes in the transmitters non-volatile memory by

pressing the [SHIFT] key and then the [ENTER] key.

– Example:

SHIFT

LIN DP

FT–SHI

T 011P3

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTL I N 3011DP

FC WOSING.RK . .

PTL I N 301 1

NO VO ATLNDA TA ILE

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

T 011P3

WARNING • Be sure to disconnect the SFC leads from the transmitter before

unplugging them from the SFC.

• Be sure the SFC is disconnected from a transmitter in the analog

mode before returning the loop to the automatic operating mode.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 123

Section 7 —Startup

7.1 Introduction

Section Contents This section includes these topics

Section Topic See Page

7.1 Introduction ................................................................................123

7.2 Startup Tasks .............................................................................124

7.3 Running Analog Output Check...................................................125

7.4 Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter ....................................128

7.5 Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter .............................131

7.6 Liquid Level Measurement - Vented Tank..................................133

7.7 Liquid Level Measurement - Pressurized Tank..........................136

7.8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter.....140

7.9 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with

Flush Mount Transmitter ............................................................144

7.10 Pressure Measurement with AP Transmitter..............................145

7.11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with

Remote Seals.............................................................................147

About this section This section identifies typical startup tasks associated with several

generic pressure measurement applications. It also includes the

procedure for running an optional analog output check.

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

124

7.2 Startup Tasks

About startup Once you have installed and configured a transmitter, you are ready to

start up the process loop. Startup usually includes

• Applying process pressure to the transmitter,

• Checking zero input, and

• Reading input and output.

You can also run an optional output check to “ring out” an analog loop

prior to startup.

Procedure reference The actual steps in a startup procedure will vary based on the type of

transmitter and the measurement application. In general, we use the SFC

to check the transmitter’s input and output under static process

conditions, and make adjustments as required before putting the

transmitter into full operation with the running process.

Choose the applicable procedure to reference in this section from Table

37 based on your type of transmitter and the measurement application.

The reference procedure will give you some idea of the typical tasks

associated with starting up a transmitter in a given application.

Table 37 Startup Procedure Reference

IF transmitter type

is . . . AND application is . . . THEN reference

procedure in section . . .

Differential

Pressure (DP) Flow Measurement 7.4

Pressure Measurement 7.5

Liquid Level Measurement

for Vented Tank with Dry

Reference Leg*

7.6

Liquid Level Measurement

for Pressurized Tank with

Liquid-Filled Reference Leg*

7.7

Gauge Pressure

(GP) Pressure or Liquid Level

Measurement** 7.8

Flush Mount Pressure or Liquid Level

Measurement 7.9

Absolute Pressure

(AP) Pressure Measurement** 7.10

DP with Remote

Seals Liquid Level Measurement 7.11

* These applications also apply for flange-mounted liquid level type transmitters that

are usually mounted directly to a flange at the zero level of the tank.

** These applications also apply for GP and AP type transmitters equipped with remote

seals. However, you can only confirm that input pressure correlates with transmitter

output in processes using remote seal connections.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 125

7.3 Running Analog Output Check

Background You can put the transmitter into a constant-current source mode to

checkout other instruments in the loop such as recorders, controllers,

and positioners. Using the SFC, you can tell the transmitter to change its

output to any value between 0 (4mA) and 100 (20mA) percent and

maintain that output. This makes it easy to verify loop operation through

the accurate simulation of transmitter output signals before bringing the

loop on line. Note that the constant-current source mode is also referred

to as the output mode.

ATTENTION The transmitter does not measure the input or update the output while it

is in the constant-current source mode.

Procedure The procedure in Table 38 outlines the steps for using a transmitter in its

output mode and clearing the output mode.

Table 38 Using Transmitter in Constant-Current Source Mode

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and

turn it on. If possible, locate SFC where

you can also view receiver instrument in

loop. If you want to verify loop

calibration, connect a precision

milliammeter or a voltmeter across a 250

ohm resistor in loop to compare

readings.

See Figure 38 for sample SFC and

meter connections in a typical

analog loop with a differential

pressure type transmitter.

2 DE READ

TA ON.G

?TRIPS SECURED?

Be sure any switches that may trip

alarms or interlocks associated with

analog loop are secured or turned

off.

3 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TA ON.G

SFC WORK ING.. .

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT3Ø11

Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured

and establish communications with

sample transmitter PT 3011

4 INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTL I N 3011DP

FC WOSING.RK . .

PTOU T

30111

3.24

Display shows current transmitter

output level and it will update every

six seconds. Be sure to time your

next key press with an updated

display.

5 X

SW VER

PTOU T

30111

PTOU T

30111

3_Ø

Key in 30% for desired output signal

level of 8.8 mA (2.2V).

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

126

7.3 Running Analog Output Check, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 38 Using Transmitter in Constant-Current Source Mode, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

6 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTOUT 301 11P#

FC WOSING.RK . .

PTOU T

30111

3.ØØØ

Output signal is set at 30% (8.8

mA/2.2 V). A “#” character appears

on right side of display to remind

you that transmitter is in its output

mode.

7 Check that receiving device indication is

at its 30% point. If applicable, check that

milliammeter reading is 8.8 mA or

voltmeter reading is 2.2 V across 250

ohm resistor.

If indication is inaccurate, check

calibration of receiving device.

8 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to check

indications at these output percentages.

If output is … Then meter

reads…

0% 4.0mA/1.0V

25% 8.0mA/2V

50% 12.0mA/3V

60% 13.6mA/3.4V

80% 16.8mA/4.2V

100% 20.0mA/5.0V

Use transmitter output as a

calibration input source for

instruments in loop.

9 INPUT

OUT-

PUT

CLR

(NO)

PTOUT 301 11P#

FC WOSING.RK . .

%Ø.ØØ

PTOUT 301 11P#

FC WOSING.RK . .

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

T 011P3

Exit constant-current source mode.

Check that # character disappears

from right side of display since

transmitter is no longer in output

mode.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 127

7.3 Running Analog Output Check, Continued

Procedure, continued

Figure 38 Typical SFC and Meter Connections for Constant-Current Source Mode.

250 Ω

Voltmeter

SFC

Power

Supply

Field

Terminals

Receiver

Red +

Black -

Precision

Milliammeter

Differential Pressure

Type Transmitter

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

128

7.4 Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter

Procedure The procedure in Table 39 outlines the steps for starting up a differential

pressure (DP) type transmitter in a flow measurement application. Refer

to Figure 39 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for

typical SFC and meter connections.

Figure 39 Typical Piping Arrangement for Flow Measurement with DP Type Transmitter

LP Blockoff

Plug G

Plug F

Valve A

Valve B

Valve C

HP Blockoff

Differential

Pressure

Transmitter

ATTENTION For the procedure in Table 39, we are assuming that all the valves on the

three-valve manifold and the block-off valves were closed at

installation.

Table 39 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement With SFC

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and

turn it on. If possible, locate SFC where

you can also view receiver instrument in

loop. If you want to verify transmitter

output, connect a precision milliammeter

or voltmeter in loop to compare

readings.

See Figure 38 for sample SFC and

meter connections in a typical

analog loop with a differential

pressure type transmitter.

2 Open equalizer valve C. See Figure 39 for sample piping

arrangement.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 129

7.4 Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 39 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement With SFC, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

3 Open valves A and HP block-off to make

differential pressure zero (0) by applying

same pressure to both sides of meter

body.

Allow system to stabilize at full static

pressure - zero differential.

4 DE READ

TA ON.G

?TRIPS SECURED?

Be sure any switches that may trip

alarms or interlocks associated with

analog loop are secured or turned

off.

5 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TA ON.G

SFC WORK ING.. .

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT3Ø11

Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured

and establish communications with

sample transmitter PT 3011

6 ^

SHIFT

INPUT

OUT-

PUT

LIN AG NO.DP T

FT–SHI

PTINP 3Ø111UT

FC WOSING

RK . .

PTINP 3Ø111UT

.9 351Ø"H2O_39F

Initiate shift key selection.

Read applied input pressure.

Reading is updated every six

seconds.

7 INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

FC WOSING.RK . .

%Ø. Ø

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

Call up output for display.

Read 0% output on display for

corresponding zero input pressure.

For analog transmission, check that

milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%)

output.

If SFC and Then…

milliammeter

readings…

are exactly go to Step 11.

zero (4mA)

are not exactly go to Step 9.

zero (4mA)

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

130

7.4 Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 39 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement With SFC, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

9 ^

SHIFT

INPUT

OUT-

PUT

RESET

COR-

RECT

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

FT–SH I

PTINP 3Ø111UT

FC WOSING

RK . .

PTINP 3Ø111UT

.9 351Ø"H2O_39F

PTINP 3Ø111UT

ZRO NPUTEI ?

PTINP 3Ø111UT

FC WOSING

RK . .

PTINP 3Ø111UT

ZROENPUTIED

PTINP 3Ø111UT

.Ø Ø42Ø"H2O_39F

Initiate shift key selection.

Read applied input pressure.

Prompt asks if the applied input

pressure equals zero input. If it is

zero input, go to next keystroke. If it

is not, press [CLR] key to exit

function and try again.

Zero input is set equal to applied

input pressure.

10 Repeat Steps 6 to 8.

11 Close equalizer valve C.

12 Open valve B and LP block-off valve to

begin measuring process differential

pressure.

13 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to

check that output signal does

correspond to applied input pressure. If

readings don’t correspond, check that

transmitter has been installed correctly.

If applicable, blow down piping to be

sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.

Check SFC and milliammeter readings

again. If readings are still not correct,

verify transmitter’s configuration data

and change its range setting if needed.

14 Remove SFC and milliammeter from

loop.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 131

7.5 Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter

Procedure The procedure in Table 40outlines the steps for starting up a differential

pressure (DP) type transmitter in a pressure measurement application.

Refer to Figure 40 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure

38 for typical SFC and meter connections.

Figure 40 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with DP Type Transmitter.

Valve D

Valve A

Plug C

LP Vent

HP Vent

HP side

Differential

Pressure

Transmitter

LP side

Table 40 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and

turn it on. If possible, locate SFC where

you can also view receiver instrument in

loop. If you want to verify transmitter

output, connect a precision milliammeter

or voltmeter in loop to compare

readings.

See Figure 38 for sample SFC and

meter connections in a typical

analog loop with a differential

pressure type transmitter.

2 Close valve D. See Figure 40 for sample piping

arrangement.

3 Open plug C and valve A to apply head

pressure H to meter body. Then, open

LP vent.

Allow system to stabilize at head

pressure.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

132

7.5 Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 40 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

4 DE READ

TA ON.G

?TRIPS SECURED?

Be sure any switches that may trip

alarms or interlocks associated with

analog loop are secured or turned

off.

5 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TA ON.G

SFC WORK ING.. .

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT3Ø11

Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured

and establish communications with

sample transmitter PT 3011

6 E

LRV

SET

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTLRV 3Ø111

Ø. ØØØØ PS I

PTLRV

3Ø1 1

?SET

PTLRV 3Ø111

1. 8315 PS I

Read present LRV setting.

Prompt asks if you want to set LRV

to applied pressure.

LRV is set to applied head pressure.

7 INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

FC WOSING.RK . .

%.Ø

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

ØØØ

Call up output for display.

Read 0% output on display for

corresponding zero line pressure

plus head pressure H. For analog

transmission, check that

milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%)

output.

8 Close plug C

9 Open valve D to begin measuring

process line pressure.

10 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to

check that output signal does

correspond to applied line pressure. If

readings don’t correspond, check that

transmitter has been installed correctly.

If applicable, blow down piping to be

sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.

Check SFC and milliammeter readings

again. If readings are still not correct,

verify transmitter’s configuration data

and change its range setting if needed.

11 Remove SFC and milliammeter from

loop.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 133

7.6 Liquid Level Measurement - Vented Tank

Procedure The procedure in Table 41 outlines the steps for starting up a differential

pressure (DP) type transmitter in a liquid level measurement application

for a vented tank with a dry reference leg. Refer to Figure 41 for the

piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and

meter connections.

Figure 41 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type

Transmitter and Vented Tank

Valve A

Plug C

LP Vent

Tap location at

the minimum level

to be measured

To HP connection

on meter body

Differential

Pressure

Transmitter

ATTENTION For the procedure in Table 41, we are assuming that the tank is empty

and the piping arrangement includes a block-off valve.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

134

7.6 Liquid Level Measurement - Vented Tank, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 41 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and

turn it on. If possible, locate SFC where

you can also view receiver instrument in

loop. If you want to verify transmitter

output, connect a precision milliammeter

or voltmeter in loop to compare

readings.

See Figure 38 for sample SFC and

meter connections in a typical

analog loop with a differential

pressure type transmitter.

2 Close block-off valve A. See Figure 41 for sample piping

arrangement.

3 Open plug C. Allow system to stabilize at head

pressure.

4 DE READ

TA ON.G

?TRIPS SECURED?

Be sure any switches that may trip

alarms or interlocks associated with

analog loop are secured or turned

off.

5 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TA ON.G

SFC WORK ING.. .

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT3Ø11

Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured

and establish communications with

sample transmitter PT 3011

6 E

LRV

SET

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTLRV 3Ø111

Ø. ØØØØ "H2O

_39F

PTLRV

3Ø1 1

?SET

PTLRV 3Ø111

1.Ø 624 "H2O

_39F

Read present LRV setting.

Prompt asks if you want to set LRV

to applied pressure.

LRV is set to applied head pressure.

7 INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

FC WOSING.RK . .

%.Ø

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

ØØØ

Call up output for display.

Read 0% output on display for

corresponding empty tank pressure

plus head pressure H. For analog

transmission, check that

milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%)

output.

8 Close plug C

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 135

7.6 Liquid Level Measurement - Vented Tank, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 38 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank,

Continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

9 Open valve A to begin measuring tank

pressure. Leave LP side vented to

atmosphere.

ATTENTION If the URV was

calculated on the approximate

density of the liquid and/or tank

height, the exact URV can be set by

filling the tank to the desired full

scale level and then setting the URV

through the SFC. See section 6.7 in

this manual for details.

10 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to

check that output signal does

correspond to applied tank level

pressure. If readings don’t correspond,

check that transmitter has been installed

correctly. If applicable, blow down piping

to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped

in it. Check SFC and milliammeter

readings again. If readings are still not

correct, verify transmitter’s configuration

data and change its range setting if

needed.

11 Remove SFC and milliammeter from

loop.

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

136

7.7 Liquid Level Measurement - Pressurized Tank

Procedure The procedure in Table 42 outlines the steps for starting up a differential

pressure (DP) type transmitter in a liquid level measurement application

for a pressurized tank with a liquid-filled (wet) reference leg. Refer to

Figure 42 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for

typical SFC and meter connections.

Figure 42 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type

Transmitter and Pressurized Tank

Valve A

Plug C at

zero level

Tap location at the

minimum level to be

measured

HP side of transmitter

Differential

Pressure

Transmitter

Valve B Plug D

ATTENTION For the procedure in Table 42, we are assuming that:

• The tank is empty and the reference leg is filled.

• The high pressure (HP) side of the transmitter is connected to the

wet reference leg. Note that the transmitter will work if the HP side

is connected to the bottom of the tank, but not within the guaranteed

accuracy specifications.

• The transmitter is mounted below the zero level of the tank, so “h” is

greater than zero. If h equals zero, plug C is eliminated from the

piping and the LP vent is opened instead.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 137

7.7 Liquid Level Measurement - Pressurized Tank, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 42 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and

turn it on. If possible, locate SFC where

you can also view receiver instrument in

loop. If you want to verify transmitter

output, connect a precision milliammeter

or voltmeter in loop to compare

readings.

See Figure 38 for sample SFC and

meter connections in a typical

analog loop with a differential

pressure type transmitter.

2 Close block-off valves A and B. See Figure 42 for sample piping

arrangement.

3 Open plugs C and D. Allow system to stabilize at head

pressure.

4 DE READ

TA ON.G

?TRIPS SECURED?

Be sure any switches that may trip

alarms or interlocks associated with

analog loop are secured or turned

off.

5 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TA ON.G

SFC WORK ING.. .

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT3Ø11

Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured

and establish communications with

sample transmitter PT 3011

6 E

LRV

SET

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTLRV 3Ø111

Ø. ØØØØ "H2O

_39F

PTLRV

3Ø1 1

?SET

PTLRV 3Ø111

1.Ø5 32 "H2O

_39F

Read present LRV setting.

Prompt asks if you want to set LRV

to applied pressure.

LRV is set to applied head pressure

H1 times density of liquid in

reference leg.

7 INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

FC WOSING.RK . .

%.Ø

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

ØØØ

Call up output for display.

Read 0% output on display for

corresponding empty tank pressure

plus head pressure H1. For analog

transmission, check that

milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%)

output.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

138

7.7 Liquid Level Measurement - Pressurized Tank, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 42 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank,

continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

If you … Then…

can not fill tank go to Step 9.

can fill tank to go to Step 10.

desired full-

scale level

9 Key in URV that is equal to full tank

pressure. See section 6.7 in this manual

for details on keying in a range value.

Go to Step 14.

10 Close plugs C and D.

11 Open valves A and B. Fill tank to desired

full scale level.

12 URV

100%

SET

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

5.Ø ØØØ "H2 O

_39F

PTUR V

3Ø1 1

?SET

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

.5 32Ø "H2 O

_39FØ

Read present URV setting.

Prompt asks if you want to set URV

to applied pressure.

URV is set to full tank pressure.

13 INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

FC WOSING.RK . .

%1Ø

.PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

.ØØØ

Call up output for display, with full

tank pressure applied.

Read 100% output on display for

corresponding full tank pressure.

For analog transmission, check that

milliammeter reading is 20 mA

(100%) output.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 139

7.7 Liquid Level Measurement - Pressurized Tank, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 42 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank,

continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

14 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to

check that output signal does

correspond to empty and full tank

pressures. If readings don’t correspond,

check that transmitter has been installed

correctly. If applicable, blow down piping

to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped

in it. Check SFC and milliammeter

readings again. If readings are still not

correct, verify transmitter’s configuration

data and change its range setting if

needed.

ATTENTION Ranging the

transmitter in this way makes it

reverse acting.

15 Remove SFC and milliammeter from

loop.

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

140

7.8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP

Transmitter

Procedure The procedure in Table 43 outlines the steps for starting up a gauge

pressure (GP) type transmitter in a pressure or liquid level measurement

application. Refer to Figures 43 and 44 for the piping arrangement

identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections.

Figure 43 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with GP Type Transmitter

Block-off

valve no.2

Gauge

Pressure

Transmitter

Union

Block-off

valve no.1 Pipe

Plug

Process Tee connector

Figure 44 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with GP Type

Transmitter

Tap location at the minimum

level to be measured

Gauge

Pressure

Transmitter

Block-off

valve

To Process Head

connection on

meter body

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 141

7.8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP

Transmitter, Continued

Procedure, continued

ATTENTION For the procedure in Table 43, we are assuming that piping arrangement

includes a block-off valve and a Tee-connector. If your piping does not

include a Tee-connector, you can only verify that the input and output

readings correlate.

Table 43 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement With SFC

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and

turn it on. If possible, locate SFC where

you can also view receiver instrument in

loop. If you want to verify transmitter

output, connect a precision milliammeter

or voltmeter in loop to compare

readings.

See Figure 38 for sample SFC and

meter connections in a typical

analog loop with a differential

pressure type transmitter.

2 Close block-off valve. See Figure 43 or 44 for sample

piping arrangement.

3 Remove plug from Tee-connector to

vent it to atmosphere, if applicable. Allow system to stabilize at static

pressure.

4 DE READ

TA ON.G

?TRIPS SECURED?

Be sure any switches that may trip

alarms or interlocks associated with

analog loop are secured or turned

off.

5 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TA ON.G

SFC WORK ING.. .

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT3Ø11

Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured

and establish communications with

sample transmitter PT 3011

6 ^

SHIFT

INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

FT–SH I

PTINP 3Ø111UT

FC WOSING

RK . .

PTINP 3Ø111UT

.Ø Ø42Ø PSI

Initiate shift key selection.

Read applied input pressure which

should be zero.

7 INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

FC WOSING.RK . .

%.Ø

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

ØØØ

Call up output for display.

Read 0% output on display for

corresponding input pressure. For

analog transmission, check that

milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%)

output.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

142

7.8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP

Transmitter, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 43 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement With SFC,

continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

If SFC and Then…

milliammeter

readings…

are zero (4mA) go to Step 11.

are not zero go to Step 9.

(4mA) and Tee

-connector is

level with

transmitter

are not zero go to Step 10.

(4mA) and Tee

-connector is

above

transmitter

9 ^

SHIFT

INPUT

OUT-

PUT

RESET

COR-

RECT

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

FT–SH I

PTINP 3Ø111UT

FC WOSING

RK . .

PTINP 3Ø111UT

.8 54 73PSI

PTINP 3Ø111UT

ZRO NPUTEI ?

PTINP 3Ø111UT

FC WOSING

RK . .

PTINP 3Ø111UT

ZROENPUTIED

PTINP 3Ø111UT

.Ø Ø29ØPSI

Initiate shift key selection.

Read applied input pressure.

Prompt asks if the applied input

pressure equals zero input. If it is

zero input, go to next keystroke. If it

is not, press [CLR] key to exit

function and try again.

Zero input is set equal to applied

input pressure. Go to Step 11.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 143

7.8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP

Transmitter, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 43 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement With SFC,

continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

10 E

LRV

SET

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTLRV 3Ø111

Ø. ØØØØ PS I

PTLRV

3Ø1 1

?SET

PTLRV 3Ø111

1.Ø ØØ5 PS I

Read present LRV setting.

Prompt asks if you want to set LRV

to applied pressure.

LRV is set to applied pressure.

11 Close Tee-connector and slowly open

block-off valve to apply process

pressure to transmitter.

12 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to

check that output signal does

correspond to zero and full-scale

pressures. If readings don’t correspond,

check that transmitter has been installed

correctly. If applicable, blow down piping

to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped

in it. Check SFC and milliammeter

readings again. If readings are still not

correct, verify transmitter’s configuration

data and change its range setting if

needed.

13 Remove SFC and milliammeter from

loop.

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

144

7.9 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with Flush

Mount Transmitter

Procedure The procedure in Table 43 outlines the steps for starting up a gauge

pressure (GP) type transmitter in a pressure or liquid level measurement

application. Refer to Figures 45 and 46 for the flush mount transmitter

arrangement and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections.

ATTENTION For the procedure in Table 43, we are assuming that piping arrangement

includes a block-off valve and a Tee-connector. If your piping does not

include a Tee-connector, you can only verify that the input and output

readings correlate.

Figure 45 Typical Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter

Process

Flush Mount

Transmitter

1" Pipe Mount -

316 SS Weld Nipple

(standard option)

Figure 46 Typical Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter

Flush Mount

Transmitter

Maximum Level

Minimum Level

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 145

7.10 Pressure Measurement with AP Transmitter

Procedure The procedure in Table 44 outlines the steps for starting up an absolute

pressure (AP) type transmitter in a pressure measurement application.

Refer to Figure 47 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure

38 for typical SFC and meter connections.

Figure 47 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with AP Type Transmitter.

Shut-off

valve no.2

Absolute

Pressure

Transmitter

Union

Shut-off

valve no.1 Pipe

Plug

Process Tee connector

For additional overrrange protection, use

Sprague engineering type gauge saver or

Fairchild model 95 gauge guard (style 1)

ATTENTION For AP transmitters, you can only verify that the input and output

readings correlate.

Table 44 Starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and

turn it on. If possible, locate SFC where

you can also view receiver instrument in

loop. If you want to verify transmitter

output, connect a precision milliammeter

or voltmeter in loop to compare

readings.

See Figure 38 for sample SFC and

meter connections in a typical

analog loop with a differential

pressure type transmitter.

2 Set process pressure to zero level Allow system to stabilize at zero

pressure.

3 DE READ

TA ON.G

?TRIPS SECURED?

Be sure any switches that may trip

alarms or interlocks associated with

analog loop are secured or turned

off.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

146

7.10 Pressure Measurement with AP Transmitter, Continued

Procedure,

continued

Table 44 Starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

4 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TA ON.G

SFC WORK ING.. .

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT3Ø11

Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured

and establish communications with

sample transmitter PT 3011

5 ^

SHIFT

INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

FT–SH I

PTINP 3Ø111UT

FC WOSING

RK . .

PTINP 3Ø111UT

.Ø Ø42Ø PSI

Initiate shift key selection.

Read applied input pressure which

should be zero.

6 INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

FC WOSING.RK . .

%.Ø

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

ØØØ

Call up output for display.

Read 0% output on display for

corresponding input pressure. For

analog transmission, check that

milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%)

output.

7 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to

check that output signal does

correspond to zero and full-scale

pressures. If readings don’t correspond,

check that transmitter has been installed

correctly. If applicable, blow down piping

to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped

in it. Check SFC and milliammeter

readings again. If readings are still not

correct, verify transmitter’s configuration

data and change its range setting if

needed.

8 Remove SFC and milliammeter from

loop.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 147

7.11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with

Remote Seals

Procedure The procedure in Table 45 outlines the steps for starting up a differential

pressure (DP) type transmitter with remote diaphragm seals in a liquid

level measurement application. Refer to Figure 48 for the piping

arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter

connections.

Figure 48 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type

Transmitter with Remote Seals

HP Side

Zero Level (empty)

Full Level

LP Side

Fixed

Ref. Leg

Differential

Pressure

Transmitter with

remote seals

Variable

Head H1

ATTENTION For the procedure in Table 45, we are assuming that the tank is empty

and the remote seal flanges are installed at their final positions. The

transmitter is a model STR93D or STR12D with a compound

characterized meter body. The DP transmitter has its high pressure (HP)

side connected to the tank’s lower flange and low pressure (LP) side

connected to the upper flange. (Note that connections would be reversed

for a model STR13D transmitter or a model STR12D transmitter

without a compound characterized meter body.)

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

148

7.11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with

Remote Seals, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 45 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement with

SFC

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and

turn it on. If possible, locate SFC where

you can also view receiver instrument in

loop. If you want to verify transmitter

output, connect a precision milliammeter

or voltmeter in loop to compare

readings.

See Figure 38 for sample SFC and

meter connections in a typical

analog loop with a differential

pressure type transmitter.

2 DE READ

TA ON.G

?TRIPS SECURED?

Be sure any switches that may trip

alarms or interlocks associated with

analog loop are secured or turned

off.

3 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TA ON.G

SFC WORK ING.. .

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT3Ø11

Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured

and establish communications with

sample transmitter PT 3011

If you … Then…

can not empty go to Step 5.

tank

can empty tank go to Step 6.

See Figure 48 for sample piping

arrangement.

5 Key in LRV that is equal to empty tank

pressure. See section 6.7 in this manual

for details on keying in a range value.

Go to Step 8.

You can use this formula to

calculate LRV in inH2O.

LRV = H2 x Sf x –1

H2 = Height of fixed reference leg

in inches.

Sf = Specific gravity of remote

seal fill fluid.

–1 = Required for LRV

calculation since pressure is on

low side of meter body.

Example: If H2 equaled 12 feet and

the fill fluid was silicone oil,

substituting into the formula yields.

LRV = 12 ft x 12 in x 0.94 x –1

LRV = –135.36 inH2O

ATTENTION The specific gravity

of silicone oil fill fluid is 0.94 and

florolube fill fluid is 1.84.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 149

7.11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with

Remote Seals, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 45 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement with

SFC, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

6 E

LRV

SET

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTLRV 3Ø111

Ø. ØØØØ "H2O

_39F

PTLRV

3Ø1 1

?SET

PTLRV 3Ø111

1.35 36 "H2O

_39F–

Read present LRV setting.

Prompt asks if you want to set LRV

to applied pressure.

LRV is set to fixed reference leg

pressure H2 times specific gravity of

remote seal fill fluid and –1 for

pressure on low side of meter body.

7 INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

FC WOSING.RK . .

%.Ø

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

ØØØ

Call up output for display.

Read 0% output on display for

corresponding empty tank pressure

plus reference pressure H2. For

analog transmission, check that

milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%)

output.

If you … Then…

can not fill tank go to Step 9.

can fill tank go to Step 10.

9 Key in URV that is equal to full tank

pressure. See section 6.7 in this manual

for details on keying in a range value.

Go to Step 12.

You can use these formulas to

calculate URV in inH2O.

Span = H1 x SL

H1 = Height of variable head

in inches.

SL = Specific gravity of

measured liquid.

URV = Span + LRV

Example: If H1 equaled 10 feet, the

measured liquid was water, and the

LRV equaled –135.36 inH2O;

substituting into the formulas yields.

Span = 10 ft x 12 in x 1.00

Span = 120 inH2O

URV = 120 inH2O + –135.36 inH2O

URV = –15.36 inH2O

ATTENTION The specific gravity

of water at 60 °F (15.6 °C) is 1.00.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

150

7.11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with

Remote Seals, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 45 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement with

SFC, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

10 URV

100%

SET

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

5.Ø ØØØ "H2 O

_39F

PTUR V

3Ø1 1

?SET

PTURV 3Ø1 11

.536Ø1"H2O

_39F–

Read present URV setting.

Prompt asks if you want to set URV

to applied pressure.

URV is set to full tank pressure.

11 INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

FC WOSING.RK . .

%1Ø

.PTOU T 3Ø1 11P

.ØØØ

Call up output for display, with full

tank pressure applied.

Read 100% output on display for

corresponding full tank pressure.

For analog transmission, check that

milliammeter reading is 20 mA

(100%) output.

12 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to

check that output signal does

correspond to empty and full tank

pressures. If readings don’t correspond,

check that transmitter has been installed

correctly. If applicable, blow down piping

to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped

in it. Check SFC and milliammeter

readings again. If readings are still not

correct, verify transmitter’s configuration

data and change its range setting if

needed.

13 Remove SFC and milliammeter from

loop.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 151

Section 8 —Operation

8.1 Introduction

Section Contents This section includes these topics:

Section Topic See Page

8.1 Introduction ................................................................................151

8.2 Accessing Operation Data .........................................................152

8.3 Changing Default Failsafe Direction...........................................155

8.4 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area...............................................157

8.5 Saving and Restoring a Database..............................................159

8.6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display .......................................163

About this section This section identifies how to access typical data associated with the

operation of an ST 3000 transmitter. It also includes procedures for:

• Changing the default failsafe direction,

• Writing data in the scratch pad area,

• Saving and Restoring a database, and

• Monitoring optional Local Smart Meter display.

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

152

8.2 Accessing Operation Data

Summary You can access this data relevant to the operation of the transmitter

using an SFC.

• Input

• Output

• Span

• Upper Range Limit

• Status

• Failsafe Output Direction

• Sensor Temperature

• Scratch Pad Messages

• PROM Serial Number

Procedure Table 46 summarizes the keystrokes required to access given operation

data from the transmitter using an SFC. These keystrokes assume that

SFC communications have been established with the transmitter by

pressing the [ID] key. The values shown in displays are for example

purposes only.

Table 46 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access

IF you want to view… THEN use these keystrokes…

the present input pressure,

which is updated every six

seconds

SHIFT FT–SHI

LIN DP T 011P3

INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTIN P 301 11UT

FC WOSING

RK . .

PTINP 3Ø111UT

.37Ø21 "H2O_39F

the present transmitter

output in percent, which is

updated every six seconds

INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTOUT 301 11P

FC WOSING.RK . .

%5. 7

PTOUT 301 11P

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 153

8.2 Accessing Operation Data, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 46 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access,

continued

IF you want to view… THEN use these keystrokes…

the span, which is the URV

minus the LRV SPAN

URL

Ø. Ø

PTSPA 3Ø111N

ØØ2"H2O_39F

the Upper Range Limit of

the transmitter ^

SHIFT FT–SHI

LIN DP T 011P3

SPAN

URL

PTUR L 3Ø1 11

4.ØØ ØØ "H2O_39F

the status of transmitter

operation at the present

time

STAT

F/S DIR

PTST A 301 1ST

FC WOSING.RK . .

PTST A 301 1ST

TA USSHECKC=O

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

T 011P3

the present failsafe output

direction for the transmitter

ATTENTION You can

change the default failsafe

direction from upscale to

downscale. See Changing

default failsafe direction in

this section.

SHIFT FT–SHI

LIN DP T 011P3

STAT

F/S DIR

PTF / S 301 1I

FC WOSING.RK . .

PTF / S 301 1I

/S FEFPSCAULE

PTF / S 301 1I

/S FEFOSCADLE

AWN

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

154

8.2 Accessing Operation Data, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 46 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access,

continued

IF you want to view… THEN use these keystrokes…

the present temperature

(±5 °C) measured by

circuitry in the transmitter’s

sensor

ATTENTION You can

change the temperature

engineering units to °F, °R

or °K by pressing the [UNITS]

key to select and then the

[CONF] key to return to the

temperature display.

CONF

NGO IST C F

ITYORMCONF ?

CONF I G

CMe ntr o ?ef

NGO IST C F

TEMORSENS ?P

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

NGO IST C F

FC WOSING

RK . .

T PSO M

16 29 ÞC6.

SEN R

the present message in the

scratch pad area of memory ^

SHIFT FT–SHI

LIN DP T 011P3

SCR PAD

P3PD T

FC WOSING

RK . .

SCR A 011

PTH A

AL BC3/2ON 2 /

SCR C 1AD

I93

PTH A

YOBndNSH

SCR C 2AD

JFTH2

the PROM serial number B

CONF

NGO IST C F

ITYORMCONF ?

CONF I G

CMe ntr o ?ef

NGO IST C F

TEMORSENS ?P

NGO IST C F

7751SER# 21ØØØ

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 155

8.3 Changing Default Failsafe Direction

Background Transmitters are shipped with a default failsafe direction of upscale.

This means that the transmitter’s output will be driven upscale

(maximum output) when the transmitter detects a critical status.

You can change the direction from upscale to downscale (minimum

output) by cutting jumper W1 on the Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)

Analog and DE mode

differences If your transmitter is operating in the analog mode, an upscale failsafe

action will drive the transmitter’s output to greater than 21 mA or a

downscale action will drive its output to less than 3.8 mA.

If your transmitter is operating in the DE mode, an upscale failsafe

action will cause the transmitter to generate a “+ infinity” digital signal,

or a downscale failsafe action will cause it to generate a “– infinity”

digital signal. The STIMV IOP module interprets either signal as “not a

number” and initiates its own configured failsafe action for the control

system. The STDC card initiates the failsafe mode configured through

the transmitter when either signal is generated.

ATTENTION The failsafe direction display that you can access through the SFC only

shows the state of the failsafe jumper in the transmitter as it correlates to

analog transmitter operation. The failsafe action of the digital control

system may be configured to operate differently than indicated by the

state of the jumper in the transmitter.

Procedure The procedure in Table 47 outlines the steps for cutting the failsafe

direction jumper on the transmitter’s PWA. Figure 49 shows the

location of the failsafe direction jumper on the PWA of, Release 300

transmitters.

The nature of the integrated circuitry used in the transmitter’s PWA

makes it susceptible to damage by stray static discharges when it is

removed from the transmitter. Follow these tips to minimize chances of

static electricity damage when handling the PWA.

• Never touch terminals, connectors, component leads, or circuits when

handling the PWA.

• When removing or installing the PWA, hold it by its edges or bracket

section only. If you must touch the PWA circuits, be sure you are

grounded by staying in contact with a grounded surface or wearing a

grounded wrist strap.

• As soon as the PWA is removed from the transmitter, put it in an

electrically conductive bag or wrap it in aluminum foil to protect it.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

156

8.3 Changing Default Failsafe Direction, Continued

Procedure, continued Table 47 Cutting Failsafe Direction Jumper

Step Action

1 Turn OFF transmitter power. Loosen end-cap lock and unscrew end

cap from electronics side of transmitter housing.

2 If applicable, carefully turn Local Smart Meter counterclockwise to

remove it from PWA mounting bracket and unplug cable from

connector on back of meter assembly.

Loosen two retaining screws and carefully pull mounting bracket and

PWA from housing. Unplug flex tape and power connectors from

component side of PWA, and remove PWA.

3 With component side of PWA facing you, locate failsafe direction

jumper W1 and cut it in half with small wire cutter such as dykes. See

Figure 48. This changes failsafe action from upscale to downscale.

4 Reverse applicable previous steps to replace PWA.

5 Turn ON transmitter power.

Figure 49 Location of Failsafe Direction Jumper on PWA.

Failsafe

Direction

Jumper

Power

Connector

Meter

Connector

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 157

8.4 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area

Background You can enter or edit a message in the scratch pad area of memory

consisting of two groups of 16 characters each through the SFC.

Procedure The procedure in Table 48 outlines the steps for editing a sample

message in the scratch pad area. This procedure assumes that SFC

communications have been established with the transmitter by pressing

the [ID] key

Table 48 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 ^

SHIFT

SCR PAD

FT–SHI

LIN DP T 011P3

P3PD T

FC WOSING

RK ..

SCR A 011

PTH A

AL BC3/2ON 2 /

SCR C 1AD

I93

Initiate shift key selection.

Call up first group of 16 characters.

PTH A

YOBndNSH

SCR C 2AD

JFTH2

Call up second group of 16

characters

3 M

PTH A

YOBndNSH

SCR C 2AD

JFTH2

Move cursor to 6th character “H”.

Cursor moves one character space

to right with each press. Use [←]

key to move cursor one character

space to left with each press. Note

that cursor keys will automatically

toggle between pad 1 and 2 when

moving forward or backward through

message as applicable.

4 NUM/

ALPHA

PTH A

YOBndNSH

SCR C 2AD

JFT*2

Enter alpha mode so you can use

SFC keyboard to enter alphabetic

characters.

5 E

LRV

SCR PAD

PTH A

YOBndESH

SCR C 2AD

JFT*2

PTH A

YOBndESH

SCR C 2AD

JFT*2

Key in “E” and “space” to change

name from JOHN to JOE

6 NUM/

ALPHA

PTH A

YOBndESH

SCR C 2AD

JFT

Exit alpha mode.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

158

8.4 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 48 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

PTH A

AL BC3/2ON 2 /

SCR C 1AD

I93

Return to first group of 16

characters.

8 M

PTH A

AL BC3

/2ON 2 /

SCR C 1AD

I93

Move cursor to 10th character “3”.

SEC VAR

PTH A

AL BC6/

2ON 2 /

SCR C 1AD

I93

Change “3” to “6” to reflect revised

calibration date.

10 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

CLR

(NO)

FC WOSING

RK ..

SCR A

PTH A

AL BC6/

2ON 2 /

SCR C 1AD

I93

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

T 011P3

Save changes in message.

Exit scratch pad without saving

changes in message.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 159

8.5 Saving and Restoring a Database

Background If it ever became necessary to replace a damaged transmitter with a

spare, you could save the configuration database from the damaged

transmitter to the HOLD memory in the SFC and then restore the saved

configuration database from the HOLD memory in the spare transmitter.

In fact, you could restore the saved configuration database in any

number of transmitters as long as you change the tag number (ID) in the

restored database.

NOTE: The configuration data for the optional Local Smart Meter is

stored in a memory located on the transmitter’s PWA. If a database

save and restore is done with the SFC, then the meter configuration is

restored along with the transmitter configuration.

Figure 50 shows a graphical summation of the save and restore database

function.

Figure 50 Summary of Save and Restore Database Function.

RESTORE

SFC

Hold

Memory

ST 3000

Output Form

Damping Time

LRV

URV

Output Signal Mode

Message Format

Failsafe Mode

PT 3011

LINEAR

2.0 sec.

35.0 psi

200.0 psi

SINGLE RNG

6-BYTE

Read only

Saved Configuration Database

ST 3000

Working

Memory

Output Form

Damping Time

LRV

URV

Output Signal Mode

Message Format

Failsafe Mode

PT 3011

LINEAR

2.0 sec.

35.0 psi

200.0 psi

SINGLE RNG

6-BYTE

Read Only

Restored Configuration Database

SAVE

Working

Memory

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

160

8.5 Saving and Restoring a Database, Continued

Procedure The procedure in Table 49 outlines the steps for saving a database from

one transmitter and restoring it in another.

Table 49 Saving and Restoring a Database

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 Connect SFC across loop wiring for

transmitter with database to be saved

and turn it on.

Be sure to put analog loop into

manual mode.

2 DE READ

TA ON.G

?TRIPS SECURED?

Be sure any switches that may trip

alarms or interlocks associated with

analog loop are secured or turned

off.

3 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TA ON.G

SFC WORK ING.. .

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT3Ø11

Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured

and establish communications with

sample transmitter PT 3011

4 B

CONF

NGO IST C F

ITYORMCONF ?

Call up first configuration parameter.

CONF I G

CMe ntr o ?ef

Call up next configuration

parameter.

NGO IST C F

TEMORSENS ?P

Call up next configuration

parameter.

NGO IST C F

7751SER# 21ØØØ

Call up next configuration

parameter.

NGO IST C F

STORSAVE ?REE

Call up save/restore function.

9 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TES RE/ E O

TADSAVE ?A

SAV R

Prompt asks if you want to save

database from this transmitter.

10 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

ATEA

SOARE ?U

SAV D

YURE

Prompt asks for confirmation of

database save function.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 161

8.5 Saving and Restoring a Database, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 49 Saving and Restoring a Database, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

11 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

ATEASAV D

FC WOSING

RK . .

ATEASAV D

AT SDEDAVA

TES RE/ E O

TADSAVE ?A

SAV R

Answer yes to prompt and initiate

database save function.

Database saved to SFC HOLD

memory.

12 Disconnect SFC and connect it to loop

wiring for transmitter whose database is

to be restored.

ATTENTION Be sure to leave SFC

power on. The saved database will be

lost if the SFC power is turned off.

Be sure to put analog loop into

manual mode.

13 DE READ

TA ON.G

?TRIPS SECURED?

Be sure any switches that may trip

alarms or interlocks associated with

analog loop are secured or turned

off.

14 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TA ON.G

SFC WORK ING.. .

LIN AG NO.DP T

Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured

and establish communications with

sample transmitter without a tag

number (ID) whose database is to

be restored.

15 B

CONF

NGO IST C F

ITYORMCONF ?

Call up first configuration parameter.

CONF I G

CMe ntr o ?ef

Call up next configuration

parameter.

NGO IST C F

TEMORSENS ?P

Call up next configuration

parameter.

NGO IST C F

7751SER# 21ØØØ

Call up next configuration

parameter.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

162

8.5 Saving and Restoring a Database, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 49 Saving and Restoring a Database, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

NGO IST C F

STORSAVE ?REE

Call up save/restore function.

20 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TES RE/ E O

TADSAVE ?A

SAV R

Prompt asks if you want to save

database from this transmitter.

TES RE/ E O

TADRES T ?A

SAV R

ORE

Call up prompt for restore function. It

asks if you want to restore saved

database in this transmitter.

22 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TADRES T AORE

SOARE ?UYURE

Prompt asks for confirmation of

database restore function.

23 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TADRES T AORE

FC WOSING

RK . .

TADRES T AORE

AT RDTOREES DA

TES RE/ E O

TADRES T ?A

SAV R

ORE

Answer yes to prompt and initiate

database restore function.

Saved database has been restored

(written) to transmitter’s memory.

24 CLR

(No)

NGO IST C F

STORSAVE ?REE/

Return to configuration parameter

menu selection.

25 CLR

(No)

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

T 011P3

Exit configuration and verify that

transmitter’s ID now reflects ID from

restored database. Tag number PT

3011 is used for example purposes

only. Change tag number and other

configuration data as required.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 163

8.6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display

Display description Figure 51 shows a Local Smart Meter display with all its indicators and

segments lit for reference and Table 50 gives a brief description of what

the indications mean.

Figure 51 Display With All Indicators Lit.

100

18 8

ANALOG

FLOW

In H O

GPH mmHg

GPM PSI

OUTPUT MODE

CHECK STATUS

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

SPAN

ZERO

KNOWN VALUE

Table 50 Description of Display Indicators Shown in Figure 51

Display Indicator What It Means When Lit

17-Segment Bargraph Gives a gross indication of the transmitter’s PV output from 0 to

100%.

Digital Readout Gives an indication of the transmitter’s PV output in either percent

of span or actual engineering units. The display range is

±19,990,000 and it is automatically ranged to provide the best

precision possible within the limits of the display. A second

decimal place expands the precision of range values within

±19.99 to 1/100th of a unit.

% Digital readout represents output in percent of span. This is the

default engineering units selection.

FLOW Transmitter is configured for Square Root output conformity.

OUTPUT MODE Transmitter is in its output mode and it is not sending a real PV

signal.

CHECK STATUS Transmitter in DE mode is broadcasting a critical status or

transmitter in Analog mode has an output that is less than –2.0%

or greater than 106%. Use the SFC to check transmitter’s status.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

164

8.6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display, Continued

Display description,

continued

Table 50 Description of Display Indicators Shown in Figure 51, continued

Display Indicator What It Means When Lit

KNOWN VALUE The Upper Value or Lower Value being displayed has previously

been configured to the value shown.

ANALOG Transmitter is in its Analog mode. (When indicator is OFF,

transmitter is in its DE mode)

inH2O Inches of Water is selected engineering units for digital readout

K Multiplies digital reading by 1,000. Turns on automatically when

reading exceeds 1999.

GPH Gallons per hour is selected engineering units for digital readout.

(Note that the FLOW indicator must also be lit to allow this

selection.)

GPM Gallons per minute is selected engineering units for digital

readout. (Note that the FLOW indicator must also be lit to allow

this selection.)

mmHg Millimeters of Mercury is selected engineering units for digital

readout.

PSI Pounds per Square Inch is selected engineering units for digital

readout.

A Transmitter is absolute pressure type. Digital readout represents

absolute values.

Stick-On Label (not shown) Selected engineering unit equals one of these units which is

available as a stick-on label from Honeywell drawing number

30756918-001.

Kpa = Kilopascals

Mpa = Megapascals

mbar = Millibar

bar = Bar

g/cm2 = Grams per Square Centimeter

Kg/cm2 = Kilograms per Square Centimeter

mmH2O = Millimeters of Water

inHg = Inches of Mercury

mH2O = Meters of Water

Typical operation

indications Table 51 summarizes typical Local Smart Meter indications. Note that

other combinations of status messages are possible.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 165

8.6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display, Continued

Typical operation

indications, continued

Table 51 Summary of Typical Local Smart Meter Indications.

Meter Indication What It Means Meter Indication What It Means

100

No power

applied.

100

---

Meter has

detected

transmitter output

that is not-a-

number.

100

ANALOG In H O

Normal display

for transmitter in

Analog mode

with digital

readout in

inches of water.

100

GPM

Display range is

Over Limit. Upper

value is

19,990,000 and

transmitter output

is over 100%.

1000

FLOW

GPM

9990

Normal display

for transmitter in

DE mode and

square root

output. Digital

readout is

gallons per

minute with

1000 multiplier.

100

OUTPUT MODE

Transmitter is in

output mode.

Bargraph and

readout show

value that was

entered through

SFC.

100

CHECK STATUS

Transmitter in

DE mode is in

non-critical

status.

Displayed value

may not be valid.

If display is “- - -”

instead of a

value,

transmitter is in

critical status.

100

200

Input pressure

equal to or

greater than

200%. Display

flashes between

200% (or twice

current URV in

EU) and O-L.

Transmitter locks

output at 200%

and will go no

higher regardless

of input.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

166

8.6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display, Continued

Operation error codes Table 52 identifies possible meter error codes and what they mean.

Table 52 Possible Smart Meter Error Codes.

If error indication is . . . Then, it means

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

You have tried to set local Zero or Span adjustment in a

Series 100 transmitter which does not support this option.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

You have tried to set a pressure type engineering unit for a

transmitter in SQUARE ROOT mode (FLOW) or have tried

to set a flow type engineering unit for a transmitter in

LINEAR mode (pressure). After this error is displayed, the

meter will return to the unit # (EU#) of the Engineering Unit

it was displaying before the set function was invoked. You

may then select another unit or exit in the normal fashion.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

You have tried to select a process variable for the

transmitter using the VAR SEL. button. The Variable Select

button is non-functioning on the ST 3000 R300 transmitter.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

You have tried to set Lower or Upper display limit for

pressure type engineering units (EU1 to EUC), or Lower

display limit for flow type engineering units (EUD,EUE) or

CUSTOM unit (EUF) in transmitter configured for SQUARE

ROOT output. Or, you have tried to set upper display limit

for flow or Custom unit in transmitter with SQUARE ROOT

output and URV set to zero (0). In SQUARE ROOT mode,

the transmitter’s URV cannot equal zero. The Lower and

Upper display limits only apply for CUSTOM (EUF) unit in

transmitter configured for LINEAR output. The Upper

display limit also applies for FLOW (EUD,EUE) and

CUSTOM (EUF) units with transmitter in SQUARE ROOT

mode , but the Lower display limit is fixed at zero (0) and

cannot be changed.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 167

8.6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display, Continued

Operation error codes,

continued

Table 52 Possible Smart Meter Error Codes, continued.

If error indication is . . . Then, it means

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

You have tried to set a span value that is outside

acceptable limits for your transmitter.

1000

ANALOG

UPPER

VALUE

UNITS

LOWER

VALUE

SET

VAR

SEL.

You have tried to invoke a Local Smart Meter set function

with the transmitter’s Write Protect jumper in its Read Only

position. You cannot make changes in the Local Smart

Meter settings when the transmitter’s configuration is write

protected.

Meter/transmitter

interaction • Cycling transmitter power OFF/ON will have no affect on meter

configuration. The meter digital readout will be in the previously set

engineering units and applicable upper and lower display limits will be

intact when transmitter power is restored. (See ATTENTION in

Section 6.8 when setting range values and configuring the meter

display.)

• If you switch the transmitter mode from Analog to DE, the ANALOG

indicator on the meter will go out. If you switch from DE to Analog

mode, the ANALOG indicator will light.

• If you reconfigure the transmitter output conformity from SQUARE

ROOT to LINEAR, the meter’s digital readout will automatically

revert to the default engineering unit of percent and the FLOW

indicator will go out when the change is downloaded to the

transmitter. Likewise, if you reconfigure the transmitter output

conformity from LINEAR to SQUARE ROOT, the meter’s digital

readout will automatically revert to the default engineering unit of

percent and the FLOW indicator will light when the change is

downloaded to the transmitter. In either case, you must reconfigure the

transmitter as outlined in Section 6.11 or 6.12 of this manual.

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

168

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 169

Section 9 —Maintenance

9.1 Introduction

Section Contents This section includes these topics

Section Topic See Page

9.1 Introduction ................................................................................169

9.2 Preventive Maintenance.............................................................170

9.3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms.............................171

9.4 Replacing PWA ..........................................................................175

9.5 Replacing Meter Body................................................................178

About this section This section provides information about preventive maintenance

routines, cleaning barrier diaphragms, and replacing damaged parts.

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

170

9.2 Preventive Maintenance

Maintenance routines

and schedules The ST 3000 transmitter itself does not require any specific maintenance

routine at regularly scheduled intervals. However, you should consider

carrying out these typical inspection and maintenance routines on a

schedule that is dictated by the characteristics of the process medium

being measured and whether blow-down facilities or purge systems are

being used.

• Check piping for leaks

• Clear the piping of sediment or other foreign matter

• Clean the transmitter’s pressure chambers including the barrier

diaphragms

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 171

9.3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms

Background Depending on the characteristics of the process medium being

measured, sediment or other foreign particles may collect in the process

head cavity/chamber and cause faulty measurement. In addition, the

barrier diaphragm or diaphragms in the transmitter’s meter body may

become coated with a residue from the process medium. The latter is

also true for external diaphragms on flange mount and remote seal type

transmitters.

In most cases, you can readily remove the process head or heads from

the transmitter’s meter body to clean the process head cavity and inspect

the barrier diaphragm or diaphragms. For flange mount and remote seal

diaphragms, you may only need to run a purge line in the tank to rinse

off the face of the diaphragm.

Procedure The procedure in Table 53 outlines the general steps for inspecting and

cleaning barrier diaphragms. You may have to modify the steps to meet

your particular process or transmitter model requirements.

Table 53 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms

Step Action

1 Close all valves and isolate transmitter from process. Open vent in

process head to drain fluid from transmitter’s meter body, if required.

ATTENTION We recommend that you remove the transmitter

from service and move it to a clean area before taking it apart.

2 Remove nuts from bolts that hold process head or heads to meter

body. Remove process heads and bolts.

Nuts

Process

head O-ring

Center

section Process

head

O-ring

Bolts

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

172

9.3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 53 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms, continued

Step Action

Remove O-ring and clean interior of process head using soft bristle

brush and suitable solvent.

Inspect barrier diaphragm for any signs of deterioration or corrosion.

Look for possible residue and clean if necessary.

NOTE: If diaphragm is dented, has distorted convolutions or radial

wrinkles, performance may be affected. Contact TAC for

assistance.

Replace O-ring.

ATTENTION

• We recommend that you install a new O-ring whenever a process

head is removed for cleaning.

• The process head for a GP or an AP transmitter with single-head

design has two O-ring grooves. A large one which is 2 in (50.8

mm) in diameter and a small one which is 1.3 in (33 mm) in

diameter as shown in the following illustration. On high-pressure,

model STG180, GP transmitters, be sure to use a small O-ring in

the smaller/inner groove. On other models of GP and AP

transmitters, use a large O-ring in the larger/outer groove. Never

use both O-rings together.

Larger O-ring

groove for

lower pressure

applications

Smaller O-ring

groove for

high pressure

applications

22518

GP/AP Process Head

• For process heads of a GP or AP transmitter with dual-head

design, see detail illustration for differential pressure transmitters

in Step 2.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 173

9.3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 53 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms, continued

Step Action

Coat threads on process head bolts with anti-seize compound such

as “Neverseize” or equivalent.

7 Replace process head or heads and bolts. Finger tighten nuts.

Use a torque wrench to gradually tighten nuts to torque rating shown

in Table 48 in sequence shown in following illustration. Tighten head

bolts in stages of 1/3 full torque, 2/3 full torque, and then full torque.

Always tighten head bolts in

sequence shown and in these

stages:

1. 1/3 full torque

2. 2/3 full torque

3. Full torque

Return transmitter to service.

CAUTION Do not exceed the overload rating when placing the

transmitter back into service or during cleaning operations. See

Overpressure ratings in Section 3 of this manual.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

174

9.3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms, Continued

Torque ratings Table 54 lists process head bolt torque ratings for given transmitter type.

Table 54 Process Head Bolt Torque Ratings

Bolting Type Meter Body

Type

Process Head

Bolting Size Carbon Steel –

Standard; no option

specified

B7M Bolting

[“B7” Option]

Stainless Steel NACE

[“CR” Option] 316 Stainless Steel

Non-NACE [“SS”

Option]

7/16 x 14 UNC 20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m

[15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft]

20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m

[15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft]

20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m

[15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft]

20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m

[15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft]

7/16 x 20 UNF NA NA 25,8 N-m +/- 1,3 N-m

[19.0 Lb-Ft +/- 1.0 Lb-Ft]

Draft Range

Transmitter

M12 x 1.75 25,8 N-m +/- 1,3 N-m

[19.0 Lb-Ft +/- 1.0 Lb-Ft]

NA NA NA

M12 x 1.75 63,7 N-m +/- 3,2 N-m

[47.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.4 Lb-Ft]

NA NA NA

7/16 x 20 UNF NA NA 63,7 N-m +/- 3,2 N-m

[47.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.4 Lb-Ft]

7/16 x 14 UNC 67,8 N-m +/- 3,4 N-m

[50.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.5 Lb-Ft]

48,8 N-m +/- 2,4 N-m

[36.0 Lb-Ft +/- 1.8 Lb-Ft]

56,9 N-m +/- 2,8 N-m

[42.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.1 Lb-Ft]

56,9 N-m +/- 2,8 N-m

[42.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.1 Lb-Ft]

3/8 x 16 UNC 39,3 N-m +/- 2,0 N-m

[29 Lb-Ft +/- 1.5 Lb-Ft]

NA 39,3 N-m +/- 2,0 N-m

[29 Lb-Ft +/- 1.5 Lb-Ft]

39,3 N-m +/- 2,0 N-m

[29 Lb-Ft +/- 1.5 Lb-Ft]

M8 x 1.25 27,1 N-m +/- 1,4 N-m

[20.0 Lb-Ft +/- 1.0 Lb-Ft]

NA NA NA

All Other DP,

GP and AP

Transmitters

5/16 x 18 UNC NA NA 20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m

[15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft]

20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m

[15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft]

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 175

9.4 Replacing PWA

About the PWA

Electronics Board The circuitry in the ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters is of the single

PWA design. The PWA contains connectors for the flex-tape conductor

from the sensor, the loop power wires and a connector for the optional

smart meter cable.

Procedure The procedure in Table 55 outlines the steps for replacing the PWA.

Table 55 Replacing PWA.

Step Action

Turn OFF transmitter power.

ATTENTION We recommend that you remove the transmitter

from service and move it to a clean area before taking it apart.

Loosen end cap lock and unscrew end cap from electronics side of

transmitter housing.

We recommend that you use a ground strap or ionizer when handling

the PWA, since electrostatic discharges can damage certain circuit

components.

• If equipped with a Local Smart Meter, carefully turn Smart Meter

counterclockwise to remove it from PWA mounting bracket and

unplug cable from connector on back of meter assembly.

• Loosen two retaining screws and carefully pull mounting bracket

and PWA from housing.

• Using the retaining clip, unplug flex tape connector and 2-wire

power connector from PWA, and remove PWA.

Flex-Tape Connector

Local Smart

Meter

Cable

PWA and

Mounting Bracket

Transmitter

End Caps

Power

Connector

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

176

9.4 Replacing PWA, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 55 Replacing PWA, continued

Step Action

If your transmitter… Then…

has Local Smart Meter go to Step 5

Option

does not have Local Smart go to Step 7

Meter Option

Note orientation of mounting bracket on PWA (side without cable

connectors). Unplug meter cable from connector on PWA. Remove

screw retainers from other side of mounting screws so you can

remove screws and mounting bracket from PWA. Set PWA aside.

Restraining

Clip

Mounting

Bracket

Meter Cable

Mounting Screws

Meter cable is installed

between PWA and

mounting bracket.

J4 Meter

Connector

PWA Connector Side

XXXXXX ASSY XXXXXXXX-XXX

REV X

Orient mounting bracket as noted above with meter cable still located

in slot on its right-hand side, install mounting screws through bracket

and replacement PWA, and install retainers to hold screws in place.

Plug meter cable into connector J4 on PWA and be sure cable is still

under restraining clip on front of bracket. Go to Step 9.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 177

9.4 Replacing PWA, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 55 Replacing PWA, continued

Step Action

7 Note orientation of mounting bracket on PWA (side without cable

connectors). Remove screw retainers from other side of mounting

screws so you can remove screws and mounting bracket from PWA.

Set PWA aside.

PWA Connector Side

Mounting

Bracket

Mounting Screws

XXXXXX ASSY XXXXXXXX-XXX

REV X

Orient mounting bracket as noted above, install mounting screws

through bracket and replacement PWA, and install retainers to hold

screws in place.

Reverse actions in Steps 2 and 3, as applicable, to install PWA and

bracket to transmitter housing.

We recommend that you lubricate end-cap O-ring with silicon grease

such as Dow Corning #33 or equivalent before you replace end cap.

ATTENTION Be sure to orient Local Smart Meter for proper

viewing through end-cap window. You can rotate the meter mounting

orientation in 90 degree increments.

Return transmitter to service and turn ON power.

If applicable, verify Local Smart Meter configuration data.

Reconfigure selected engineering units and lower and upper display

range values as required. (See Subsections 6.11 and/or 6.12 for

details.)

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

178

9.5 Replacing Meter Body

Procedure You can replace the complete meter body including process heads or

only the meter body on selected DP, GP and AP transmitters by using

the existing process head(s).

Use the procedure in Table 56 to install a meter body only.

Table 56 Replacing Meter Body Only

Step Action

Complete first 3 Steps in Table 55, as applicable, to remove PWA.

2 Use 4 mm size hex wrench to completely loosen set screw outside

housing.

Process Head Process Head

Meter Body

Set Screw

Carefully turn complete meter body counterclockwise to unscrew it

from electronics housing.

Remove nuts from bolts that hold process head or heads to center

section. Remove process heads and bolts

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 179

9.5 Replacing Meter Body, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 56 Replacing Meter Body Only, continued

Step Action

Remove O-ring and clean interior of process head using soft bristle

brush and suitable solvent.

Replace O-ring.

ATTENTION The process head for a GP or an AP transmitter with

single-head design has two O-ring grooves. A large one which is 2 in

(50.8 mm) in diameter and a small one which is 1.3 in (33 mm) in

diameter as shown in the following illustration. On high-pressure,

model STG180, GP transmitters, be sure to use a small O-ring in the

smaller/inner groove. On other models of GP and AP transmitters,

use a large O-ring in the larger/outer groove. Never use both O-rings

together.

Larger O-ring

groove for

lower pressure

applications

Smaller O-ring

groove for

high pressure

applications

22518

GP/AP Process Head

• For process heads of a GP or AP transmitter with dual-head

design, see detail illustration for differential pressure transmitters

in Step 8.

Coat threads on process head bolts with anti-seize compound such

as “Neverseize” or equivalent.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

180

9.5 Replacing Meter Body, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 56 Replacing Meter Body Only, continued

Step Action

8 Carefully assemble process head or heads and bolts to new meter

body. Finger tighten nuts.

Typical Series 100 DP Transmitter Meter Body

HP SIDE

SIDE

Process

head

Process

head

Meter

Body

O-ring

Bolts

Nuts Flex Tape

9 Use a torque wrench to gradually tighten nuts to torque rating shown

in Table 48 in sequence shown in following illustration. Tighten head

bolts in stages of 1/3 full torque, 2/3 full torque, and then full torque.

22519

lways tighten head bolts in

sequence shown and in these

stages:

1. 1/3 full torque

2. 2/3 full torque

3. Full torque 4

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 181

9.5 Replacing Meter Body, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 56 Replacing Meter Body Only, continued

Step Action

Feed flex tape on new meter body through neck of housing and

screw new meter body into housing until bottom of header portion of

center section is approximately flush with neck of electronics

housing.

Tighten outside set screw to be sure it is fully seated in slot in

header. Loosen set screw half turn, rotate housing to desired position

and tighten set screw.

Reverse actions in Steps 2 and 3 in Table 52, as applicable, to return

PWA and bracket to transmitter housing.

We recommend that you lubricate end-cap O-ring with silicon grease

such as Dow Corning #33 or equivalent before you replace end cap.

ATTENTION Be sure to orient Local Smart Meter for proper

viewing through end-cap window. You can rotate the meter mounting

orientation in 90 degree increments.

Return transmitter to service and turn ON power.

Verify transmitter’s configuration data. Restore saved database, if

applicable.

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

182

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 183

Section 10 —Calibration

10.1 Introduction

Section Contents This section includes these topics

Section Topic See Page

10.1 Introduction ................................................................................183

10.2 Overview ....................................................................................184

10.3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal ...............................................185

10.4 Calibrating Range with SFC.......................................................189

10.5 Resetting Calibration..................................................................192

About this section This section provides information about calibrating the transmitter’s

analog output and measurement range. It also covers the procedure for

resetting calibration to default values as a quick alternative to

measurement range calibration.

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

184

10.2 Overview

About calibration The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter does not require recalibration at

periodic intervals to maintain accuracy. If a recalibration is required, we

recommend that you do a bench calibration with the transmitter

removed from the process and located in a controlled environment to get

the best accuracy.

If the transmitter will be operating in the analog mode, you must

calibrate its output signal before you calibrate the transmitter’s

measurement range using the SFC. While it is not required to calibrate

the output signal first for transmitter's operating in the DE mode, you

can do it by using the SFC to read the output in percent.

You can also use the SFC to reset the calibration data to default values,

if it is corrupted, until the transmitter can be recalibrated. See Table 59

in this section for details.

ATTENTION If the transmitter is digitally integrated with our TPS system, you can

initiate range calibration and calibration reset functions through displays

at the Universal Station, GUS and Allen-Bradley PLCs. However, we

still recommend that you do a range calibration using an SFC with the

transmitter removed from service and moved to a controlled

environment. Details about doing a calibration reset through the

Universal Station are given in the PM/APM Smartline Transmitter

Integration Manual PM12-410 which is part of the TDC 3000X system

bookset.

Test Equipment

Required Depending upon the type of calibration you choose, you may need any

of the following test equipment to accurately calibrate the transmitter:

• Digital Voltmeter or milliammeter with 0.02% accuracy or better

• SFC Smart Field Communicator

• Calibration-standard input source with a 0.02% accuracy

• 250 ohm resistor with 0.01% tolerance or better.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 185

10.3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal

Background You can calibrate the transmitter’s analog output circuit at its 0 and

100% levels by using the transmitter in its constant-current source

mode. It is not necessary to remove the transmitter from service.

Procedure The procedure in Table 57 shows the steps for calibrating the output

signal for a transmitter in the analog mode. Note that the procedure is

similar for a transmitter in the DE mode, but the SFC must be used to

read the output in percent in place of the milliammeter or voltmeter

readings.

Table 57 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and

turn it on. Connect a precision

milliammeter or voltmeter ( 0.02%

accuracy or better) in loop to check

readings.

See Figure 38 for sample test

equipment hookup.

ATTENTION Be sure the

accuracy of the resistor is 0.01% or

better for current measurements

made by voltage drop.

2 DE READ

TA ON.G

?TRIPS SECURED?

Be sure any switches that may trip

alarms or interlocks associated with

analog loop are secured or turned

off.

3 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TA ON.G

SFC WORK ING.. .

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT3Ø11

Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured

and establish communications with

sample transmitter PT 3011

4 INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTOUT 301 11P

FC WOSING.RK . .

PTOU T

30111

3.24

Display shows current transmitter

output level and it will update every

six seconds. Be sure to time your

next key press with an updated

display.

5 Z

PTOU T

30111

Ø_

Key in 0 (zero) as desired output

signal level in percent.

6 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTOUT 301 11P

FC WOSING.RK . .

%.Ø

PTOUT 301 11P

ØØ

Put transmitter into constant-current

source mode as noted by “#” sign in

display and set output to 0%.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

186

10.3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 57 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

7 RESET

COR-

RECT

PTOUT 301 11P

FC WOSING.RK . .

ACE

PTOUT 301 11P

CORR D C ZERO

Calibrate output signal to 0%.

8 Check that milliammeter or voltmeter

reading is 4mA or 1V.

If reading is … Then…

correct go to Step 11.

lower than 4mA go to Step 9.

or 1V

higher than go to Step 10.

4mA or 1V

PTOUT 301 11P

INC C U TSN

PTOUT 301 11P#

FC WOSING.RK . .

PTOUT 301 11P

IN E mA4CRE S

ACE

PTOUT 301 11P

CORR D C ZERO

Gradually raise output to 4mA or 1V

reading. Repeat this Step as

required.

PTOUT 301 11P

DEC C U TSN

PTOUT 301 11P#

FC WOSING.RK . .

PTOUT 301 11P

DE E mA4CRE S

ACE

PTOUT 301 11P

CORR D C ZERO

Gradually decrease output to 4mA

or 1V reading. Repeat this Step as

required.

11 INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTOUT 301 11P#

FC WOSING.RK . .

%.Ø

PTOUT 301 11P

ØØ

Call up output for display.

Present output signal level in

percent.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 187

10.3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 57 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

PTOU T

30111

PTOU T

30111

1Ø

%1Ø

.PTOUT 301 11P

Key in 100 as desired output level in

percent.

13 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTOUT 301 11P#

FC WOSING.RK . .

%1Ø

.PTOUT 301 11P

.Ø

ØØ

Set output to 100%.

14 RESET

COR-

RECT

PTOUT 301 11P#

FC WOSING.RK . .

ACE

PTOUT 301 11P

CORR D C SPAN

Calibrate output to 100%.

15 Check that milliammeter or voltmeter

reading is 20mA or 5V.

If reading is … Then…

correct go to Step 18.

lower than go to Step 16.

20mA or 5V

higher than go to Step 17.

20mA or 5V

PTOUT 301 11P

INC C U TSN

PTOUT 301 11P#

FC WOSING.RK . .

PTOUT 301 11P

IN E mAØCRE S 2

ACE

PTOUT 301 11P

CORR D C SPAN

Gradually raise output to 20mA or

5V reading. Repeat this Step as

required.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

188

10.3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 57 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

PTOUT 301 11P

DEC C U TSN

PTOUT 301 11P#

FC WOSING.RK . .

PTOUT 301 11P

DE E mAØCRE S 2

ACE

PTOUT 301 11P

CORR D C SPAN

Gradually decrease output to 20mA

or 5V reading. Repeat this Step as

required.

18 ^

SHIFT

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

PTOUT 301 11P

FT–SH I

PTOUT 301 11P#

FC WOSING.RK . .

PTOUT 301 11P

DATA V L TILENA

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

T 011P3 #

Initiate shift key selection

Saves data in transmitter’s

nonvolatile memory. This takes

approximately 8 seconds.

19 INPUT

OUT-

PUT

PTOUT 301 11P#

FC WOSING.RK . .

%1Ø

.PTOUT 301 11P

.Ø

ØØ

Call up output for display.

Present output signal level in

percent.

20 CLR

(NO)

PTOUT 301 11P#

FC WOSING.RK . .

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

T 011P3

Exit constant-current source mode.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 189

10.4 Calibrating Range with SFC

Background The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter has two-point calibration. This means

when you calibrate two points in the calibration range all the points in

that range adjust to that calibration.

Procedure The procedure in Table 58 shows the steps for calibrating a differential

pressure (DP) type transmitter to a range of 0 to 200 inH2O for example

purposes. This procedure assumes that the transmitter is removed from

the process and located in a controlled environment.

ATTENTION You must have a precision pressure source with an accuracy of 0.04% or

better to do a range calibration. Note that we factory calibrate ST 3000

Smart Transmitters with inches of water ranges using inches of water

pressure referenced to a temperature of 39.2 °F (4°C).

Table 58 Calibrating Measurement Range With SFC

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 Connect power supply and SFC to

signal terminals on transmitter’s terminal

block. Connect a calibration-standard

pressure source to high pressure side of

DP type transmitter.

See Figure 52 for typical SFC,

power supply, and pressure source

hookup for calibration.

2 Turn on power supply and allow

transmitter to stabilize its operation for

approximately 30 minutes.

3 Turn on SFC.

4 DE READ

TA ON.G

?TRIPS SECURED?

Does not apply for bench calibration.

5 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TA ON.G

SFC WORK ING.. .

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT3Ø11

Acknowledge prompt and establish

communications with sample

transmitter PT 3011 to be calibrated.

6 Adjust pressure source to apply

pressure equal to LRV (0%)

7 E

LRV

PTLRV 3Ø111

ØØØ

ØØ "H2O_39F

Present LRV setting. If displayed

value does not match applied

pressure, key in matching LRV

value or adjust pressure

accordingly.

8 RESET

COR-

RECT

PTLRV

3Ø1 1

RRRECO VC?

Prompt asks if LRV is to be

calibrated to applied reference

pressure. If it is to be calibrated, go

to next Step. If it isn’t, press [CLR]

key and try again.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

190

10.4 Calibrating Range with SFC, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 58 Calibrating Measurement Range With SFC, continued

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

9 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

ORK NGCW .F.S.I

PTLRV 3Ø111

LRV TRRECO C DE

PTLRV 3Ø111

ØØØ

ØØ "H2O_39F

Calibrates LRV to reference input

pressure for zero calibration.

10 Adjust pressure source to apply

pressure equal to URV (100%)

11 URV

100%

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

ØØØ

2Ø "H2O_39F

Present URV setting. If displayed

value does not match applied

pressure, key in matching URV

value or adjust pressure accordingly

before you press [CORRECT] key in

next step.

12 RESET

COR-

RECT

PTUR V

3Ø11

RRRECO VC?

Prompt asks if URV is to be

calibrated to applied reference

pressure. If it is to be calibrated, go

to next Step. If it isn’t, press [CLR]

key and try again.

13 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

ORK NGCW .F.S.I

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

PTUR V 3Ø111

UR V TRRECO C DE

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

ØØØ

2Ø "H2O_39F

Calibrates URV to reference input

pressure for span (100%)

calibration.

14 ^

SHIFT

NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

FT–SH I

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

ORK NGCW .F.S.I

PTUR V 3Ø1 11

NO VO ATLNDA TA I LE

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

Initiate shift key selection

Saves data in transmitter’s

nonvolatile memory. This takes

approximately 8 seconds.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 191

10.4 Calibrating Range with SFC, Continued

Procedure, continued

Figure 52 Typical Calibration Hookup.

- SIGNAL +

+ -

TEST

24Vdc

Power

Supply

DVM

(See NOTES)

+ Red

- Black

ST 3000

Low

Pressure

Head

SFC

Dead Weight

Tester

(See NOTES)

250

NOTES: The digital voltmeter must have a 0.02% accuracy or better.

The calibration-standard input source must have a 0.02% accuracy.

The 250 ohm resistor must have a 0.01% tolerance or better.

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

192

10.5 Resetting Calibration

Background You can erase incorrect calibration data by resetting the data to default

values through the SFC. The default values return the transmitter

calibration to the original factory “characterization” values.

Characterization calculates a mathematical model of the performance of

the transmitter’s sensors and then stores that data in the transmitter’s

memory. Note that this is not the “final calibration” which is done at the

end of the process against the ordered range.

While resetting the calibration will return the transmitter to a close

approximation of the previous calibration using its stored

characterization data, the accuracy of the “reset” transmitter will be

lower than the specified final calibrated accuracy. The calibration is not

exact since the transmitter mounting angle may be different than the

factory mounting angle. This means that the transmitter is calculating its

output based on the characterization equation alone without any

compensation for the small residual errors of zero offset and span

correction.

For example, a typical zero offset correction is less than 0.1 inH2O for a

400 inH2O range and a typical span correction is less than 0.2%

regardless of the range (down to the point where specification turndown

begins). The typical performance of a 400 inH2O transmitter after a

calibration reset (or a “Corrects Reset” as it is often called) can be

expressed as:

Accuracy = 0.2% +

0.1 inH2O

Span inH2O

⎛

⎝

⎜ ⎞

⎠

⎟

• 100%

By correcting the zero input, the typical performance will be 0.2% or

better.

For other transmitter ranges, the initial zero offset will be scaled by the

ratio of the Upper Range Limit (URL) to 400 inH2O at 39.2°F (4°C).

Thus, for a 100 psi range, the initial zero offset can be expressed by:

0.1inH2O•2768inH2O

400inH2O=0.7inH2O or 0.025psi

Note that these are typical values and they may vary. However, our

patented characterization method includes several techniques which

help to ensure that this level of performance can be achieved.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 193

10.5 Resetting Calibration, Continued

Procedure The procedure in Table 59 shows how to reset calibration data in a

transmitter with an SFC.

Table 59 Resetting Calibration Data With SFC

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and

turn it on.

2 DE READ

TA ON.G

?TRIPS SECURED?

Be sure any switches that may trip

alarms or interlocks associated with

analog loop are secured or turned

off.

3 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TA ON.G

SFC WORK ING.. .

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT3Ø11

Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured

and establish communications with

sample transmitter PT 3011

4 ^

SHIFT

RESET

COR-

RECT

FT–SHI

LIN DP T 011P3

RECCOR

T 011P3

RE SET ST?

Initiate shift key selection

Prompt asks if you want to correct

calibration data by resetting it to

default values. If you do want to

reset data, go to next Step. If you

don’t, press [CLR] key to exit

function.

5 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

#T 011P3

OR K NGCW .F.S.I

#T 011P3

R ESETRECCOR ST

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

T 011P3 #

Previous calibration “CORRECTS”

are removed and calibration is reset

to default characterization values as

indicated by non-critical status

symbol “#” on right-hand side of

display. Symbol remains on display

until transmitter is recalibrated.

ATTENTION The accuracy of the

reset transmitter will be

approximately 0.2% at reference

conditions – See the Background

paragraph in this section for more

details. .

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

194

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 195

Section 11 —Troubleshooting

11.1 Introduction

Section Contents This section includes these topics

Section Topic See Page

11.1 Introduction ................................................................................195

11.2 Overview ....................................................................................196

11.3 Clearing the “#” Symbol From SFC Display ...............................197

11.4 Diagnostic Messages .................................................................199

11.5 Running Status Check ...............................................................202

11.6 Interpreting Messages................................................................203

11.7 Checking SFC Display and Keyboard........................................207

About this section This section identifies diagnostic messages that may appear in the SFC

and describes what they mean. An interpretation of diagnostic messages

is given which suggests possible cause and corrective action for each

message. Procedures are provided for running a status check and testing

the SFC keyboard.

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

196

11.2 Overview

Diagnostics The SFC and ST 3000 transmitter are constantly running internal

diagnostics to monitor the functions and status of the control loop and

their communications link.

When a diagnostic failure is detected, a corresponding message is

generated for the SFC display. See Section 11.4 Diagnostic Messages

for details.

ATTENTION There are additional diagnostics provided by the STIMV IOP for

transmitters integrated with the TPS system and any message will

appear in the TRANSMITTER STATUS field of the Detail Display in

the Universal Station. Details about the STIMV IOP diagnostic

messages are given in the PM/APM Smartline Transmitter Integration

Manual PM12-410 which is part of the TDC 3000X system bookset.

Troubleshooting tool Your primary troubleshooting tool is using the SFC to run a status

check, recording displayed diagnostic messages, and then interpreting

the diagnostic messages. See Table 66 to run a status check using an

SFC.

You should also use the SFC to verify the transmitter’s configuration

data and check to be sure your process is operating correctly.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 197

11.3 Clearing the “#” Symbol From SFC Display

About the “#” symbol When transmitter diagnostics detect a non-critical status condition, the

number symbol “#” appears as the last character in the top row of the

SFC display along with whatever you are displaying at the time. Thus,

the purpose of the # symbol is simply to let you know that a non-critical

status condition exists.

Procedure To clear the # symbol from the SFC display, you must first determine

what non-critical status condition exists and then correct it. The general

procedure would be:

• Press [STAT] key on SFC and record diagnostic messages that appear in

bottom row of display.

• Use Table 60 as an aid in determining the possible cause of the

diagnostic message and the suggested corrective action to take to clear

the # symbol.

• The # symbol will disappear from the display when the diagnostic

condition is corrected.

Table 60 Clearing the # Symbol from the SFC Display

If Message is. . . Then, Possible Cause is. . . And, Suggested Corrective

Action is. . .

#T 011P3

R ESETRECCOR ST

ST ATUS

All calibration “CORRECTS” were

deleted and data was reset to

default characterization values.

Recalibrate transmitter.

T 0 1 1 P 3

N C O R R E S S E X C S

S T A T U S

P A

SPAN correction factor is outside

acceptable limits. Could be that

transmitter was in output mode.

Check input pressure and be sure it

matches calibrated range value.

Check meter body. Do a URV

CORRECT procedure.

T 0 1 1 P 3

O C O R R E S S E X C Z

S T A T U S

E R

ZERO correction factor is outside

acceptable limits. Could be that

either INPUT was zero or

transmitter was in output mode

during a CORRECT procedure.

Check input pressure and be sure it

matches calibrated range value.

Check meter body. Do a LRV

CORRECT procedure.

#T 011P3

MODEOUTIN U

ST ATUS

Transmitter is operating as a

current source. Press [OUTPUT] and [CLR] keys to tell

transmitter to exit output mode.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

198

11.3 Clearing the “#” Symbol From SFC Display, Continued

Procedure, continued

Table 60 Clearing the # Symbol from the SFC Display, continued

If Message is. . . Then, Possible Cause is. . . And, Suggested Corrective

Action is. . .

#T 011P3

OAD.OM. E

ST ATUS

RVBL

#T 011P3

AULROET Y

ST ATUS

DEFMB T

Pressure input is two times

greater than URL of transmitter. • Check range and, if required,

replace transmitter with one that

has a wider range.

• Meter body may have been

damaged. Check the transmitter

for accuracy and linearity

Replace meter body and

recalibrate, if needed.

T 0 1 1 P 3

C O M A O E

S T A T U S

T D P N C P M

No temperature compensation

data exists for D/A converter. Effect will be minor degradation of

ambient temperature influence

specifications. Replace electronics

module

#T 011P3

TEMOEV

ST ATUS

OSRSR PEN

Meter body temperature is too

high. Accuracy and life span may

decrease if it remains high.

Take steps to insulate meter body

from temperature source.

#T 011P3

ST ATUS

NUWKN

Selection is unknown Be sure SFC software is latest

version. Press SHIFT and 3 to view

SFC software version.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 199

11.4 Diagnostic Messages

Summary The diagnostic messages can be grouped into one of these five

categories.

• Non-Critical Failures — Transmitter continues to calculate PV output.

• Critical Failures — Transmitter drives PV output to failsafe state.

• Communications Errors

• Invalid Key Entry Errors

• Interrupt Messages

A description of the messages in each category is given in the following

paragraphs. Note that there also a few messages that we have grouped as

general interrupt messages at the end of this section.

Non-critical failures Table 61 summarizes the non-critical SFC status message displays. All

SFC functions remain operational during a non-critical failure and the

“#” sign appears on the right hand side of the display.

Table 61 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Non-Critical Failures

Message Description

#T 011P3

R ESETRECCOR ST

ST ATUS

Must recalibrate transmitter to attain required accuracy.

T 0 1 1 P 3

N C O R R E S S E X C S

S T A T U S

P A

SPAN correction factor is outside the acceptable limits

for accurate operation.

T 0 1 1 P 3

O C O R R E S S E X C Z

S T A T U S

E R

Zero calibration value is too large. Excess zero

correction may be an indication of a problem with the

process or installation.

#T 011P3

MODEOUTIN U

ST ATUS

Transmitter is operating as current source.

#T 011P3

OAD.OM. E

ST ATUS

RVBL

#T 011P3

AULROET Y

ST ATUS

DEFMB T

Input pressure is more that 2 times greater than the

Upper Range Limit of the transmitter.

T 0 1 1 P 3

C O M A O E

S T A T U S

T D P N C P M

No temperature compensation data exists for D/A

converter.

#T 011P3

TEMOEV

ST ATUS

OSRSR PEN

Meter body temperature is too high.

#T 011P3

ST ATUS

NUWKN

Status is unknown.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

200

11.4 Diagnostic Messages, Continued

Critical failures Table 62 summarizes the critical SFC status message displays. A critical

failure has these effects on SFC operation.

• Only ID, OUTPUT, and STATUS functions remain operational.

• The critical status message is displayed for three seconds followed by

the applicable status message. Run the status check to view messages

again.

• The transmitter’s output is driven to its failsafe direction - upscale or

downscale.

Table 62 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Critical Failures

Message Description

PTOUT 301 11P

RHA M LTURPO ACF

Characterization PROM failure.

PT 3011

OLE I >ACRN <ESTC

OUT 1P

No temperature compensation data exists for

calculations.

PT 3011

OLE I >BCRN <ESTC

OUT 1P

Transmitter’s nonvolatile memory (NVM) fault.

PT 3011

OLE I >CCRN <ESTC

OUT 1P

Transmitter’s random access memory (RAM) fault.

PT 3011

OLE I >DCRN <ESTC

OUT 1P

Transmitter’s programmable read only memory (PROM)

fault.

T 0 1 1 P 3

FAULTE R BME T O

S T A T U S

Electronics (PWA) and meter body are incompatible.

PTOUT 301 11P

TUS IPC TSUENP

Possible meter body or electronics based problem.

Communication

errors Table 63 summarizes the message displays associated with

communication errors. A communication error has these effects on SFC

operation.

• All the SFC functions are disabled.

• Communication error messages are cycled in the display at two second

intervals. Press [ID] and then [ENTER] to view messages again.

Table 63 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors

Message Description

TAG O

ND NRREA D

UROE

Communications is unsuccessful.

TAG O

AI OLD CFE MM

CHK

SFC failed a communication diagnostic test.

TAG O

HI LEORO

/LTSV

Loop resistance is too large or supply voltage is too low.

TAG O

LL RAOGE

NSLPIE S E

Illegal response from transmitter.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 201

11.4 Diagnostic Messages, Continued

Communication

errors, continued

Table 63 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors, continued

Message Description

TAG O

NV DIBLA

ASDAIA T E

Transmitter database was incorrect at powerup.

TAG O

NV RIELE

STDUIA Q

Request is invalid.

TAG O

LO PLS

OEWRO

Loop resistance is too low.

TAG O

ORXT ONM ES

NSRPE

No response from transmitter.

TAG O

FTASF

UCL

SFC is not operating properly.

Invalid key entry

errors Table 64 summarizes the message displays for possible invalid key

entry errors.

Table 64 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Invalid Key Entry Errors

Message Description

None - Keystroke makes display blink Invalid keystroke

URV

>GN

PT 3011

A"H2 O

_39F

The computed SFC value is outside the display range.

Interrupt messages Table 65 summarizes messages that may interrupt the SFC display.

Table 65 Summary of Interrupt Messages For SFC Display

Message Meaning Remedy

PTOU T 30111P

ARI STC UCTITALS

Diagnostics has detected a

critical failure. Press [STAT] key to retrieve

messages.

LIN AG NO.DP :

P T3Ø11

Colon

The SFC battery is low. Recharge the battery.

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

T 011P3 #

Number Symbol

Diagnostics has detected a

non-critical failure. Or, the

transmitter is in its output

mode.

Press [STAT] key to retrieve

messages or exit the output

mode.

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

202

11.5 Running Status Check

Procedure The procedure in Table 66 shows how to run a status check using the

SFC.

Table 66 Running a Status Check With SFC

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 Connect SFC across loop wiring for

transmitter whose status is to be

checked

Be sure to put analog loop into

manual mode.

2 DE READ

TA ON.G

?TRIPS SECURED?

Be sure any switches that may trip

alarms or interlocks associated with

analog loop are secured or turned

off.

3 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

TA ON.G

SFC WORK ING.. .

LIN AG NO.DP T

PT3Ø11

Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured

and establish communications with

sample transmitter PT 3011

ATTENTION If a communications

error is detected, applicable

diagnostic messages will cycle at

two-second intervals in the display

and then display returns to the

prompt PUT LOOP IN MAN. Repeat

Steps 2 and 3 to view messages

again. Communications is not

established and all SFC functions

are disabled.

4 U

STAT

F/S DIR

T 011P3ST ATUS

OR K NGCW .F.S.I

PTST A 3011ST

TA USSHECKC=O

#T 011P3

TEMOEV

ST ATUS

OSRSR PEN

PTST A 3011ST

ARI STC UCTITALS

PTST A 3011ST

CSU ISE TUPNPT

THEN

LIN DP

.Y. .RE AD

T 011P3

Initiate status check.

Transmitter and SFC are operating

normally.

Diagnostic message appears for

detected fault.

Critical status appears followed by

applicable diagnostic messages.

Signals end of status messages for

display. Press [STAT] key to display

messages again. When there are two

or more messages, they are cycled in

display at 5-second intervals.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 203

11.6 Interpreting Messages

Interpretation table Most of the diagnostic messages that can be displayed on the SFC are

listed in alphabetical order in Table 67 along with a description and

suggested action to be taken.

Table 67 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table

Message Possible Cause What to Do

PT 301 1

RHA M LTURPO ACF

STA STU

Characterization PROM is not

functioning correctly. Replace meter body.

#T 011P3

R ESETRECCOR ST

ST ATUS

All calibration “CORRECTS” were

deleted and data was reset to

default values.

Recalibrate transmitter.

PT 3011

OLE I >ACRN <ESTC

OUT 1P

No temperature compensation

data exists for calculations.

Effect will be minor degradation of

ambient temperature influence

specifications. Replace electronics

module (PWA).

PT 3011

OLE I >BCRN <ESTC

OUT 1P

Transmitter’s nonvolatile memory

fault. Replace electronics module (PWA).

PT 3011

OLE I >CCRN <ESTC

OUT 1P

Transmitter’s random access

memory (RAM) fault. Replace electronics module (PWA).

PT 3011

OLE I >DCRN <ESTC

OUT 1P

Transmitter’s programmable read

only memory (PROM) fault. Replace electronics module (PWA).

TAG O

ND NRREA D

UROE

Communications unsuccessful. Check loop wiring and SFC

connections. If error persists,

replace transmitter.

T 0 1 1 P 3

N C O R R E S S E X C S

S T A T U S

P A

SPAN correction factor is outside

acceptable limits. Could be that

transmitter was in output mode.

Check input pressure and be sure it

matches calibrated range value.

Check meter body. Do a URV

CORRECT procedure.

T 0 1 1 P 3

O C O R R E S S E X C Z

S T A T U S

E R

ZERO correction factor is outside

acceptable limits. Could be that

either INPUT was incorrect or

transmitter was in output mode

during a CORRECT procedure.

Check input pressure and be sure it

matches calibrated range value.

Check meter body. Do an LRV

CORRECT procedure.

TAG O

AI OLD CFE MM

CHK

SFC failed a communications

diagnostic check. Could be an

SFC electronic problem or a faulty

or dead communication loop.

• Check polarity and try again.

• Press [STAT] and do any

corrective action required and try

again.

• Check communication loop.

• Replace SFC.

TAG O

HI LEORO

/LTSV

Either there is too much

resistance in loop (open circuit),

voltage is too low, or both.

Check polarity, wiring, and power

supply. There must be 11 volts

minimum at transmitter to permit

operation. Check for defective or

misapplied capacitive or inductive

devices (I/Ps) on the loop wiring.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

204

11.6 Interpreting Messages, Continued

Interpretation table,

continued

Table 67 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table, continued

Message Possible Cause What to Do

OTE

SAVE / R

W.M

ES R

ISMATCH

Hardware mismatch. Part of

Save/Restore function. Nothing – SFC tried to restore as

much of database as possible.

#T 011P3

MODEOUTIN U

ST ATUS

Transmitter is operating as a

current source. Press [OUTPUT] and [CLR] keys to tell

transmitter to exit output mode.

TAG O

LL RAOGE

NSLPIE S E

Transmitter sent illegal response

to SFC Try communicating again.

TAG O

NV DIBLA

ASDAIA T E

Transmitter database was

incorrect at powerup. • Try communicating again.

• Verify database configuration.

Manually update non-volatile

memory with each parameter.

URV

ILA

PT 3011

VREQUDEST

• Requesting transmitter to

correct or set its URV to a

value which results in too

small a span, or correct its

LRV or URV while in output

mode.

• Keystroke is not valid for given

transmitter.

• Check that correct URV

calibration pressure is being

applied to transmitter, or that

transmitter is not in output mode.

• Check that keystroke is

applicable for given transmitter.

TAG O

LO PLS

OEWRO

Not enough resistance in series

with communication loop. Check sensing resistor and increase

resistance to at least 250Ω.

#T 011P3

OAD.OM. E

ST ATUS

RVBL

#T 011P3

AULROET Y

ST ATUS

DEFMB T

Pressure input is two times

greater than URL of transmitter. • Check range and, if required,

replace transmitter with one that

has a wider range.

• Meter body may have been

damaged. Check the transmitter

for accuracy and linearity

Replace meter body and

recalibrate, if needed.

T 0 1 1 P 3

FAULTE R BME T O

S T A T U S

Electronics (PWA) and meter

body are incompatible. Obtain matching meter body for

given transmitter model and series.

Check transmitter nameplate for

model number data.

T 011P3

ONSAE

ST ATUS

RKPNESC

Transmitter sent a negative

response because it could not

process one or more commands.

Check configuration and try again.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 205

11.6 Interpreting Messages, Continued

Interpretation table,

continued

Table 67 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table, continued

Message Possible Cause What to Do

TAG O

ORXT ONM ES

NSRPE

No response from transmitter.

Could be transmitter or loop

failure.

• Try communicating again.

• Press [ID] key and do any

corrective action required and try

again.

• Check that transmitter’s loop

integrity has been maintained,

that SFC is connected properly,

and that loop resistance is at

least 250 Ω.

T 011P3

ST ATUS

OEENV N MAN

SFC’s CPU is misconfigured. Replace SFC.

OTE

SAVE / R

ITM

ES R

ISMATCHON

On a database restore, one or

more options do not match. Nothing - SFC tried to restore as

much of database as possible.

OTE

SAVE / R

SEE

ES R

FAILEDOR

Database restore function failed. Check transmitter and try again.

#T 011P3

TEMOEV

ST ATUS

OSRSR PEN

Meter body temperature is too

high. Accuracy and life span may

decrease if it remains high.

Take steps to insulate meter body

from temperature source.

#T 011P3

FAOEE

ST ATUS

TSPSR IMNL

Transmitter’s temperature sensor

has failed. Replace transmitter.

TAG O

FTASF

UCL

SFC is operating incorrectly. Try communicating again. If error

still exists, replace SFC.

PTOUT 301 11P

TUS IPC TSUENP

Input data seems wrong. Could

be a process problem, but it could

also be a meter body or PWA

problem.

Put transmitter in output mode and

press [STAT] key. Diagnostic

messages should identify where

problem is. If no other diagnostic

message is given, condition is most

likely meter body related. Check

installation and replace meter body

if condition persists.

OTE

SAVE / R

YTM

ES R

ISMATCHE

On database restore, transmitter

types do not match. Nothing - SFC tried to restore as

much of database as possible.

Continued on next page

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

206

11.6 Interpreting Messages, Continued

Interpretation table,

continued

Table 67 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table, continued

Message Possible Cause What to Do

#T 011P3

ST ATUS

NUWKN

Selection is unknown. Be sure SFC software is latest

version. Press SHIFT and 3 to view

SFC software version.

URV

WRET

PT 3011

IOTECPTED

Transmitter’s write protect jumper

is in its read only position. If authorized, move W/R jumper on

PWA, make configuration change,

then move back W/R jumper on

PWA.

URV

>GN

PT 3011

A"H2 O

_39F

Value calculation is greater than

display range. Press [CLR] key and start again. Be

sure special units conversion factor

is not greater than display range.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 207

11.7 Checking SFC Display and Keyboard

Procedure The procedure in Table 68 shows how to run an SFC display and

keyboard test.

Table 68 Running SFC Display and Keyboard Test

Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description

1 Turn on SFC

2 ^

SHIFT

PUT IN MANLOOP

FT–SH I

DI TE TPLAY

YOPLA

**DIS KAY

KE TE TBOAR

ouc

rw mn

Initiate shift key selection.

All display segments are working.

Ready to check operation of

individual keys.

3 E

LRV

KE TE TBOAR

ouc

2rw mn1

Confirm key operation by verifying

that its row and column location on

keyboard are displayed

4 Repeat Step 3 as required to check all

keys or go to Step 5 to exit test.

5 NON-VOL

ENTER

(Yes)

KE TE TBOAR

ouc

8rw mn4

PUT IN MANLOOP

Check [ENTER] key location.

Ready for operation.

ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

208

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 209

Section 12 —Parts List

12.1 Replacement Parts

Part identification • All individually salable parts are indicated in each figure by key

number callout. For example, 1, 2, 3, and so on.

• All parts that are supplied in kits are indicated in each Figure by key

number callout with the letter “K” prefix. For example, K1, K2, K3,

and so on.

• Parts denoted with a “†” are recommended spares. See Table 81 for

summary list of recommended spare parts.

Figure 53 shows major parts for given model with parts list Figure

references.

Continued on next page

210 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Figure 53 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference.

ST 3000 Release 300

Electronic Housing Assembly

See Figures 55 and 56

Single Head See

GP Models Figure

STG140 59

STG170 59

STG180 59

Single Head See

AP Models Figure

STA122 59

STA140 59

STA922 59

STA940 59

DP See

Models Figure

STD110 57

STD120 57

STD125 57

STD130 57

STD170 57

STD904 57,58

STD924 57,58

STD930 57,58

STD974 57,58

Dual Head See

GP Models Figure

STG944 60

STG974 60

LGP/LAP See

Models Figure

STG14L 61

STG17L 61

STG18L 61

STG90L 61

STG94L 61

STG97L 61

STG98L 61

STA12L 61

STA92L 61

STA14L 61

STA94L 61

Flush Mount See

GP Models Figure

STG93P 62

Flange

Mounted See

Models Figure

STF128 63

STF132 63

STF12F 63

STF13F 63

STF14F 63

STF924 63

STF932 63

STF92F 63

STF93F 63

Remote Diaphragm Seal

Models

STR12D LGP Models

STR13D STR14G

STR14A STR17G

STR93D STR94G

Attention: No replacement meter body is

available for Remote Diaphragm Seal Models.

Meter Bodies

High

Temperature See

Models Figure

STG14T 64

STF14T 64

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 211

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Figure 54 ST 3000 Transmitter Mounting Bracket Parts Reference.

Angle

Mounting

Bracket

Flat

Mounting

Bracket

Table 69 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference.

Key

No. Part Number Description Quantity

Per Unit

1 30752770-003

Angle Bracket Mounting Kit for all models except LGP and Flush mount

2 30752770-004

Angle Bracket Mounting Kit for models LGP, Flush mount, STR14G,

STR17G, and STR94G

3 51196557-001 Flat Bracket Mounting Kit for all models except LGP and Flush Mount

4 51196557-002 Flat Bracket Mounting Kit for all models LGP, Flush mount, STR14G,

STR17G, and STR94G

212 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Figure 55 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Electronics/Meter End.

12 K1

Figure 56 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Terminal Block End

13/K2

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 213

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Table 70 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figures 55 and 56

Key

No. Part Number Description Quantity

Per Unit

1 30756961-501

30756961-502 Cap for Series 900 only

Cap for Series 100 only 1

2 30756996-501

30756996-502 Cap, meter for Series 900 only

Cap, meter for Series 100 only 1

3 51205897-501†

51404078-502† Terminal assembly without lightning protection

Terminal assembly with lightning protection 1

4 51309389-501

51309389-502

51309389-503

Local Zero and Span Adjust Only

Local Smart Meter Only

Local Smart Meter With Zero and Span Adjust

5 51309397-501

51309397-504

51309397-511

51309397-514

51309397-506

51309397-507

51309397-516

51309397-517

Analog Only Electronics, Transmitter Option AN

Analog Only Electronics, Options AN,4G

Analog Only Electronics, Options AN,NE

Analog Only Electronics, Options AN,NE,4G

DE/Analog Electronics, Option DE

DE/Analog Electronics, Options DE,4G

DE/Analog Electronics, Options DE,NE

DE/Analog Electronics, Options DE,NE,4G

6 51204038-001 Retaining Clip 1

7 30756997-501 Analog meter 1

K1 30757503-001† Electronics housing seals kit (includes O-rings)

K2 51197425-001

51197425-002

Terminal assembly without lightning protection conversion kit (includes

screws, cover, and terminal block)

Terminal assembly with lightning protection conversion kit (includes

screws, cover, and terminal block)

Not

Shown 30757504-001 Electronics housing hardware kit, DP/I, GP/I, LGP/I (includes screws,

gasket, plate, washers, cover terminal, and spacers)

Continued on next page

214 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Figure 57 Series 100 and Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models STD924 & STD930 C, D, G,

H, K, and L and STD974

K2 K3 K4

K5 K6

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 215

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Table 71 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 57.

Key

No. Part Number Description Quantity

Per Unit

1 Specify complete

model number

from nameplate

plus R300

Series 100 replacement meter body without heads 1

Specify complete

model number

from nameplate

plus R300

Series 900 replacement meter body without heads 1

2 30757104-001 Adapter, meter body to electronics housing 1

30753790-001 Carbon steel bolts and nuts kit

Not Shown Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., flange adapter 4

K4 Nut, hex, metric, M12, process heads 4

K8 Bolt, hex head, metric, M12, 90mm lg., process heads 4

30753791-002 A286 SS (NACE) bolts and 302/304 SS (NACE) nuts kit

Not Shown Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., flange adapter 4

K4 Nut, hex, metric, M12, process heads 4

K8 Bolt, hex head, metric, M12, 90mm lg., process heads 4

30753785-001 St. steel vent/drain and plug kit

K1 Pipe plug 4

K2 Vent plug (all except model STD110) 2

K3 Vent bushing (all except model STD110) 2

30753787-001 Monel vent/drain and plug kit

K1 Pipe plug 4

K2 Vent plug (all except model STD110) 2

K3 Vent bushing (all except model STD110) 2

30753786-001 Hastelloy C vent/drain and plug kit

K1 Pipe plug 4

K2 Vent plug (all except model STD110) 2

K3 Vent bushing (all except model STD110) 2

30753788-003† Process head gasket kit (PTFE material)

30753788-004† Process head gasket kit for (Viton material)

K6 Head gasket [For gasket only: 30756445-501 (PTFE, quantity 12) or

30749274-501 (6 Viton head O-rings and 6 Vition flange adapter O-

rings)]

K7 O-ring 3

K9 Not Shown Gasket, flange adapter (for gasket only: 30679622-501, 6 Teflon; or

30749274-002, 6 Viton) 6

Continued on next page

216 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Table 71 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 57, continued

Key

No. Part Number Description Quantity

Per Unit

Optional Flange Adapter Kits (two heads) - Not Shown

30754419-002 Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapters with carbon steel bolts)

30754419-004 Flange adapter kit (Monel flange adapters with carbon steel bolts)

30754419-018 Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapters with 316 st. steel NACE bolts)

30754419-020 Flange adapter kit (Monel flange adapters with 316 st. steel NACE bolts)

K9 Not Shown Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., flange adapter 4

K11 Not Shown Gasket, flange adapter 2

K10 Not Shown Flange adapter 2

K12 Not Shown Filter screen 2

30754419-003 Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapters with carbon steel bolts)

30754419-019 Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapters with 316 st. steel NACE bolts)

K9 Not Shown Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., optional flange adapter 4

K11 Not Shown Gasket, flange adapter 2

K10 Not Shown Flange adapter 2

Process Head Kits (one head with PTFE head gasket)

30753908-001 Process head assembly kit (Hastelloy C head)

30753908-002 Process head assembly kit (Hastelloy C DIN head)

30753908-003 Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head with side vent/drain)

30753908-004 Process head assembly kit (st. steel head with side vent/drain)

30753908-005 Process head assembly kit (Monel head)

30753908-009 Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head without side vent/drain)

30753908-010 Process head assembly kit (stainless steel head without side vent/drain)

30753908-011 Process head assembly kit (stainless steel DIN head without side

vent/drain)

30753908-012 Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head - model STD110 only)

30753908-013 Process head assembly kit (st. steel head - model STD110 only)

30753908-014 Process head assembly kit (carbon steel DIN head - model STD110 only)

30753908-015 Process head assembly kit (st. steel DIN head - model STD110 only)

K1 Pipe plug 2

K2 Vent plug 1

K3 Vent bushing 1

K5 Process head 1

K6 Gasket (PTFE), process head 1

K11 Gasket (PTFE), optional flange adapter 1

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 217

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Table 71 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 57, continued

Key

No. Part Number Description Quantity

Per Unit

Process Head Kits (one head with Viton head gasket)

30753908-101 Process head assembly kit (Hastelloy C head)

30753908-102 Process head assembly kit (Hastelloy C DIN head)

30753908-103 Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head with side vent/drain)

30753908-104 Process head assembly kit (st. steel head with side vent/drain)

30753908-105 Process head assembly kit (Monel head)

30753908-109 Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head without side vent/drain)

30753908-110 Process head assembly kit (stainless steel head without side vent/drain)

30753908-111 Process head assembly kit (stainless steel DIN head without side

vent/drain)

30753908-112 Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head - model STD110 only)

30753908-113 Process head assembly kit (st. steel head - model STD110 only)

30753908-114 Process head assembly kit (carbon steel DIN head - model STD110 only)

30753908-115 Process head assembly kit (st. steel DIN head - model STD110 only)

K1 Pipe plug 2

K2 Vent plug 1

K3 Vent bushing 1

K6 Gasket (Viton), process head 1

K11 Gasket (PTFE), flange adapter 1

K5 Process head 1

Figure 58 Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models Models STD924 & STD930 A, B, E, F, and J

K3 K2

Continued on next page

218 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Table 72 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 58

Key

No. Part Number Description Quantity

Per Unit

1 Specify complete

model number

from nameplate

plus R300

Series 900 replacement meter body without heads 1

K1 30757506-001 Head bolts carbon steel

Kit includes: Bolts, Nuts 4

30757507-001 Head bolts stainless steel/NACE

Kit includes: Bolts, Nuts 4

30757507-002 Process Head Bolting 3/8 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE Kit

Includes: Process Head Bolts and Nuts 4

K2 30757147-001† Replacement heads carbon steel

Kit includes: Heads with side vents, Head gaskets Teflon, head gaskets

Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets

30757147-002 Replacement heads carbon steel

Kit includes: Heads without side vents, Head gaskets Teflon, head

gaskets Viton, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets

30757148-001 Replacement heads stainless steel

Kit includes: Heads with side vents, Head gaskets Teflon, Head gaskets

Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent Plugs, Gaskets

30757148-002 Replacement heads stainless steel

Kit includes: Heads without side vents, Head gaskets Teflon, Head

gaskets Viton, Bushings, Vent Plugs, Gaskets

30757149-001 Replacement heads Hastelloy

Kit includes: Heads with side vents, Head gaskets Teflon, Head gaskets

Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets

30757500-001 Replacement heads Monel

Kit includes: Head with side vents, Head gasket Teflon, Head gasket

Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets

K3 30757505-001† Process Head Gasket Kit

Kit includes: 6 Teflon head gaskets (30757100-001), 6 Viton head

gaskets (30749274-004), and 6 Teflon flange adapter gaskets

(30679622-501)

Optional Flange Adapter and Flange Adapter Gaskets - Not Shown

30679622-501 Flange adapter gaskets Teflon 6

30749274-502 Flange adapter gaskets Viton 6

30754419-002 Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapters with carbon steel bolts)

30754419-018 Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapters with 316 st. steel NACE bolts)

K9 Not Shown Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., flange adapter 4

K11 Not Shown Gasket, flange adapter 2

K10 Not Shown Flange adapter 2

K12 Not Shown Filter screen 2

30754419-003 Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapters with carbon steel bolts)

30754419-019 Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapters with 316 st. steel NACE bolts)

K9 Not Shown Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., optional flange adapter 4

K11 Not Shown Gasket, flange adapter 2

K10 Not Shown Flange adapter 2

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 219

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Figure 59 Series 100 GP and AP Meter Bodies and Series 900 AP Meter Body

K3 2

Table 73 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 59

Key

No. Part Number Description Quantity

Per Unit

2 See Table 74 Process head (GP/AP models) 1

1 Specify complete

model number

from nameplate

plus R300

Series 100 replacement meter body without head (GP/AP Models) 1

Specify complete

model number

from nameplate

plus R300

Series 900 replacement meter body without head (GP/AP Models) 1

30754154-002† Head gasket kit for all models with narrow profile meter body except

STG180 (3 sets)

30754154-003† Head gasket kit for model STG180 with narrow profile meter body (3 sets)

K2 O-ring 3

Continued on next page

220 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Table 73 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 59, continued

Key

No. Part Number Description Quantity

Per Unit

K3 Gasket, Teflon [for gasket only - 30756445-502 (narrow profile L.P), or

30756445-503 (STG180) 6

Gasket, Viton [for gasket only - 30756445-504 (narrow profile L.P), or

30756445-505 (STG180) 6

30756445-509 Gasket, Graphite (for replacement on existing STG/A X22/X40 Transmitter

with Graphite Gasket only) 6

30753792-001 Bolts & nuts kit, all models - narrow profile (carbon steel). Contains:

K1 Nut, hex, metric, M8 carbon steel 4

K4 Bolt, hex head, metric, M8, 50 mm long 4

30753793-002 A286 SS (NACE) Bolts & 304 SS (NACE) nuts kit, all models - narrow

profile. Contains:

K1 Nut, hex, 5/16 (304 stainless steel) 4

K4 Bolt, hex head, 5/16-18 4

30753793-003 Process Head Bolting 316 SS Non-NACE

Kit Includes: Process Head Bolts and Nuts. Contains:

K1 5/16 –18 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE Heavy Hex Nuts 4

K4 5/16 –18 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE Hex Cap Screw 4

Table 74 Replacement GP and AP Process Head Part Numbers for Narrow Profile Meter

Body

Material Fitting Size Models: STA122, STA140,

STG140, STG170, STG180,

STA922, STA940

Carbon steel (Series 100) 9/16 - 18UNF-2B 30755124-001

Stainless steel (Series 100) 9/16 - 18UNF-2B 30755124-002

Carbon steel 1/2 in NPT 30755124-005

Stainless steel 1/2 in NPT 30755124-006

Monel 1/2 in NPT 30755124-008

Hastelloy C 1/2 in NPT 30755124-007

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 221

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Figure 60 Series 900 Dual-Head GP Meter Bodies.

K2 K3

Table 75 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 60

Key

No. Part Number Description Quantity

Per Unit

1 Specify complete

model number

from nameplate

plus R300

Series 900 replacement meter body without heads (GP models) 1

K1 30757506-001 Head bolts carbon steel, 3/8-inch

Kit includes: Bolts, Nuts 4

30757507-001 Head bolts stainless steel/NACE, 3/8-inch

Kit includes: Bolts, Nuts 4

30757507-002 Process Head Bolting 3/8 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE

Kit Includes: Process Head Bolts and Nuts 4

K2 30757501-001 Replacement heads carbon steel

Kit includes: Head with side vents, Head dummy CS, Head gaskets

Teflon, Head gaskets Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent Plug, Gasket

30757501-002 Replacement heads carbon steel

Kit includes: Head without side vents, Head dummy CS, Head gaskets

Teflon, Head gaskets Viton, Bushings, Vent Plug, Gasket

30757502-001 Replacement heads stainless steel

Kit includes: Heads with side vents, Head dummy SS, Head gaskets

Teflon, head gaskets Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets

30757502-002 Replacement heads stainless steel

Kit includes: Heads without side vents, Head dummy SS, Head gaskets

Teflon, head gaskets Viton, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets

30756941-005 Stainless steel blind reference head (HR option)

K3 30757505-001† Process head gasket kit

Kit includes: 6 Teflon head gaskets (30757100-001), 6 Teflon flange

adapter gaskets (30679622-001), 6 Viton head gaskets (30749274-004)

Optional Flange Adapter - Not Shown

K4 30679622-501 Flange adapter gaskets Teflon 6

30749274-502 Flange adapter gaskets Viton 6

Continued on next page

222 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Figure 61 Series 100 and Series 900 LGP Meter Body.

Hexagonal Body

Round Body

Table 76 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 61

Key

No. Part Number Description Quantity

Per Unit

1 Specify complete

model number

from nameplate

plus R300

Series 100 replacement meter body (LGP and LAP model) 1

Specify complete

model number

from nameplate

plus R300

Series 900 replacement meter body (LGP and LAP model) 1

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 223

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Figure 62 Series 900 Flush Mount Meter Body.

Table 77 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 62

Key

No. Part Number Description Quantity

Per Unit

1 Specify complete

model number

from nameplate

plus R300

Series 900 replacement meter body (Flush Mount model) 1

30756445-508 Gasket Kit (0-rings)

51204496-001 316L SS Mounting Sleeve Kit

51204497-001 Calibration Sleeve Kit

Continued on next page

224 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Figure 63 Series 100 and Series 900 Flange Mounted Meter Body.

Extended Flange Design

Pseudo Flange Design

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 225

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Table 78 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 63

Key

No. Part Number Description Quantity

Per Unit

1 Specify complete

model number

from nameplate

plus R300

Series 100 replacement meter body 1

Specify complete

model number

from nameplate

plus R300

Series 900 replacement meter body 1

30749372-005 O-ring seal 1

30749372-001 O-ring seal 1

Optional Flange Adapter - Not Shown

30754419-006 Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapter with carbon steel bolts)

30754419-008 Flange adapter kit (Monel flange adapter with carbon steel bolts)

30754419-022 Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapter with 316 st. steel NACE bolts)

30754419-024 Flange adapter kit (Monel flange adapter with 316 st. steel NACE bolts)

K1 Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg. 2

K2 Flange adapter 1

K3 Gasket 1

K4 Filter screen 1

30754419-007 Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapter with carbon steel bolts)

30754419-023 Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapter with 316 st. steel NACE

bolts)

K1 Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg. 2

K2 Flange adapter 1

K3 Gasket 1

K5 30757503-001 Housing seal kit 1

Continued on next page

226 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Figure 64 High Temperature Meter Body.

Sanitary Seal Small Flange NPT

Table 79 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 64

Key

No. Part Number Description Quantity

Per Unit

1 Specify complete

model number

from nameplate

plus R300

Series 100 replacement meter body 1

Sanitary Seal Head and Gasket

51204982-001 Sanitary Seal Head GP/I (Stainless Steel Head w/ st.stl. hardware)

51204982-003 Sanitary Seal Head GP/I (Stainless Steel Head w/ SS NACE. hardware)

51204982-002 Sanitary Seal Head GP/I (Hastelloy Head w/ st.stl. hardware)

51204984-001 Gasket GP/I (includes Teflon gasket and Viton O-ring)

Flange Adapter - Not Shown

51204983-001 Flange adapter kit (½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)

51204983-002 Flange adapter kit (½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-017 Flange adapter kit (½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)

51204983-018 Flange adapter kit (½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-003 Flange adapter kit (½” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)

51204983-004 Flange adapter kit (½” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-005 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)

51204983-006 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-019 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)

51204983-020 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-007 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)

51204983-008 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 227

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Table 79 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 64, continued

Key

No. Part Number Description Quantity

Per Unit

51204983-013 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts)

51204983-014 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-023 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts)

51204983-024 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-015 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts)

51204983-016 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-009 Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)

51204983-010 Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-021 Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)

51204983-022 Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-011 Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)

51204983-012 Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-025 Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)

51204983-026 Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-037 Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)

51204983-038 Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-027 Flange adapter kit (2” Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)

51204983-028 Flange adapter kit (2” Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-029 Flange adapter kit (1½” st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts)

51204983-030 Flange adapter kit (1½” st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-039 Flange adapter kit (1½” st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts)

51204983-040 Flange adapter kit (1½” st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-031 Flange adapter kit (1½” Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts)

51204983-032 Flange adapter kit (1½” Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-033 Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts)

51204983-034 Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-041 Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts)

51204983-042 Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-035 Flange adapter kit (2” Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts)

51204983-036 Flange adapter kit (2” Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)

Continued on next page

228 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Figure 65 SFC Smart Field Communicator and Accessories.

22378

Style

K1 K2 1K4

K10

5/6

K12

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 229

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Table 80 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 65.

Key

No. Part Number Description Quantity

Per Unit

1 Battery pack assembly 1

See Figure 62 Style A – No longer available. Order conversion kit 30755131-001

30755080-501 Style B

2 30753046-501 LCD assembly 1

30752453-501

30752453-503

30752453-505

Interface cable assembly (with alligator clips)

6 feet (1.8 meters) long

12 feet (3.6 meters) long

20 feet (6 meters) long

30752453-502

30752453-504

30752453-506

Interface cable assembly (with EZ hooks)

6 feet (1.8 meters) long

12 feet (3.6 meters) long

20 feet (6 meters) long

5 30752438-501 DC battery charger, AA Nicad cell , 120 Vac 1

6 30753739-501 DC battery charger, AA Nicad cell, 240 Vac (Universal-European plug) 1

7 30752834-501 Carrying case, vinyl 1

Key

No. Part Number Description Quantity

Per Kit

30753194-001 Replacement hardware kit

K1 Bumper, recess 4

K2 Screw, metric, M3, socket head 6

K3 Cover, battery compartment 1

K4 Label, battery cover 1

K6 Carry strap 1

K7 Harness assembly, power/charger 1

K10 Actuator 1

K12 Socket head wrench kit, metric

Contents:

(1) Hex head socket wrench, size 2.5 mm

(1) Hex head socket wrench, size 3 mm

(1) Hex head socket wrench, size 4 mm

Continued on next page

230 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

12.1 Replacement Parts, Continued

Table 81 Summary of Recommended Spare Parts

Reference Spares for

Part Number Description Figure

Nmbr. Key

Nmbr. 1-10

Units 10-100

Units 100-

1000

Units

Electronics Housing Assembly Figs. 55 and 56

51309397-501

51309397-504

51309397-511

51309397-514

51309397-506

51309397-507

51309397-516

51309397-517

Analog Only Electronics, Transmitter Option AN

Analog Only Electronics, Options AN,4G

Analog Only Electronics, Options AN,NE

Analog Only Electronics, Options AN,NE,4G

DE/Analog Electronics, Option DE

DE/Analog Electronics, Options DE,4G

DE/Analog Electronics, Options DE,NE

DE/Analog Electronics, Options DE,NE,4G

55 5 1 1-2 2-4

30757503-001

Series 100/900 housing seal kit 55 & 56 K1 1 1-2 2-4

51205897-501

51404078-502

Series 100/900 terminal assembly without lightning

protection

Series 100/900 terminal assembly with lightning

protection

56 3/K2 1 1 1-2

Process head gasket kit 1 1-4 4-10

30757505-001

For STD924-A, B, E, F, and J; STD930-A, B, E, F, and

J; STG944; STG974 models

Teflon and Viton

58,60 K3

30753788-003

30753788-004

For all other Series 100 DP and STD924-C, D, G, H, K,

and L; STD930-C, D, G, H, K, and L; and STD974

models

Teflon

Viton

57 K6

30754154-002

For STA122, STA140, STA922, STA940, STG140, and

STG170

Teflon and Viton

59 K3

30754154-003 For STG180 59 K3

Meter Body 1 1-2 2-4

Specify complete Series 100/900 DP Models 57 1

model number from Series 900 DP Models 57,58 1

nameplate plus R300 Series 100/900 GP/AP Models 59 1

Series 900 GP Dual Head Model 60 1

Series 100/900 Inline and Series 900 AP Models 61 1

Series 900 Flush Mount Models 62 1

Series 100/900 Flange Mount Models 63 1

Series 100 High Temperature Models 64 1

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 231

232 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

Section 13 —Reference Drawings

13.1 Wiring Diagrams

External Wiring

Diagrams Wiring diagram drawing numbers are listed here for ST 3000 Release

300, Series 100 and 900 Transmitters. These wiring diagrams are

included in numerical order behind this page for wiring reference.

ST 3000 Description Drawing Number

Release 300 For non-intrinsically safe application 30753607

Series 100, 900 For intrinsically safe application (FM) 51204241

Transmitters For intrinsically safe application (CSA) 51204242

For intrinsically safe application (CENELEC) 51204243

Transmitter

Dimension Drawings Dimension drawings for individual transmitter models are available and

are listed in the ST 3000 Release 300 installation guide document

supplied with your transmitter. If you need a copy of a drawing, please

determine the appropriate drawing number and contact your Honeywell

representative to obtain a copy.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 233

Appendix A – Table III Options in Model Number

A.1 Table III Options Reference

Codes and

descriptions The following table lists available Table III options alphabetically and

numerically by their codes and gives a brief description of the options.

Note that restrictions do apply based on other as-built transmitter

characteristics and some options are mutually exclusive.

If Code is. . . Then, transmitter option is . . .

A1 1/2-inch NPT to M20 316 stainless steel conduit adapter.

A2 1/2-inch NPT to 3/4-inch NPT 316 stainless steel conduit adapter.

B1 or B2 Blind DIN stainless steel adapter flanges mounted with NACE bolts on process head.

CC Custom calibration to user specified range and user specified transmitter tag number

entered and stored in memory.

CF Calibration Fixture (with ¼” NPT Port for pressure source) for STG93P only.

CM Compound characterized meter body.

CV Stainless steel center vent drain and bushing.

CR A286 stainless steel and 302/304 stainless steel (NACE) nuts for process heads and

316 stainless steel (NACE) bolts for mounting flange adapter to process head.

DN 316 stainless steel modified DIN process heads.

FB Flat mounting bracket (carbon steel).

F1 Calibration test report and certificate of conformance (F3399).

F3 Certificate of conformance (F3391).

F5 Certificate of Origin (F0195).

F7 NACE certificate (F0198).

HR Stainless steel reference head (carbon steel is standard).

LP Lightning protection.

LT Low temperature (–50°C) ambient limit.

MB Angle mounting bracket (carbon steel).

ME Analog meter (0 to 100% linear, 0 to 10 square root).

Continued on next page

234 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

A.1 Table III Options Reference, Continued

Codes and descriptions,

continued

If Code is. . . Then, transmitter option is . . .

MS 316LSS Mounting Sleeve (requires customer installation to process) for STG93P

only.

OX Clean transmitter for Oxygen or Chlorine service with certificate.

SB Angle mounting bracket (stainless steel).

SH 316 stainless steel electronics housing with M20 conduit connections.

SM Local Smart Meter

SV Side vent/drain in process head (end vent/drain is standard).

S1 or S2 1/2-inch, NPT, stainless steel, adapter flange for process head.

TB Stainless steel customer wired -on tag (blank).

TC Factory configured per user supplied data.

TF Teflon process head gasket (Viton is standard).

TG Wired-on, stainless steel customer tag (4-lines, 28 characters per line; customer

supplied information).

TP Over-pressure leak test with F3392 certificate.

T1 or T2 1/2-inch, NPT, Hastelloy C, adapter flange for process head.

VT Viton head gaskets (1/2-inch adapter gaskets are special).

V1 or V2 1/2-inch, NPT, Monel, adapter flange for process head.

WP Write protection.

W1 Additional warranty for 1 year.

W2 Additional warranty for 2 years.

W3 Additional warranty for 3 years.

W4 Additional warranty for 4 years.

ZS Local Zero and Span adjustments.

00 None.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 235

A.1 Table III Options Reference, Continued

Codes and descriptions,

continued

If Code is. . . Then, transmitter option is . . .

1C FM approval body certification for:

• Explosionproof/Flameproof Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D

• Dust Ignition Proof Class II, III, Division 1, Groups E, F, G

• Non-Incendive Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D

• Intrinsically Safe Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G

1S FM approval body certification for:

• Intrinsically Safe Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G

2J CSA approval body certification for :

• Explosionproof Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D

• Dust Ignition Proof Class II, III, Division 1, Groups E, F, G

• Non-Incendive Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D

• Intrinsically Safe Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G

2S CSA approval body certification for :

• Intrinsically Safe Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G

3A LCIE approval body certification for:

• Flame Proof/ CENELEC EEx d IIC T6

• Intrinsically Safe/CENELEC EEx ia IIC T5

3D LCIE approval body certification for:

• Flame Proof/ CENELEC EEx d IIC T6

3N Zone 2 (Europe) certification for:

• Self-Declared per 94/4/EC (ATEX4)

Ex II 3 GD T6 X

Ui ≤ 42V ≤ (Zone 2)

–40 ≤ Ta ≤ 93°C

IP66/67

3S Approval body certification for:

• Intrinsically Safe/CENELEC EEx ia IIC T5

4G or 4H SA approval body certification for:

• Intrinsically Safe Ex ia IIC T4

• Non-Incendive Ex n IIC T6 (T4 with Local Smart Meter option)

5A VNIIVE approval body certification for:

• Intrinsically Safe OEx ia IIC T6 X

9X No certification

236 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 237

Appendix B – Freeze Protection of Transmitters

B.1 Possible Solutions/Methods

Problem When water is present in the process fluid and ambient temperatures can

fall below the freezing point (32°F/0°C), pressure transmitters and their

piping require freeze protection. Transmitters may also require

continuous heating, if the process fluid is tar, wax, or other medium

which will solidify at normal ambient. However, uncontrolled steam or

electric heating, in addition to wasting energy, can cause errors and

accidentally destroy the transmitter.

Solution These two basic solutions are possible:

• Eliminate the need for heating the transmitter by keeping the

freezable process fluid out of direct contact with transmitter.

• Control the steam or electric heat to prevent overheating on warm

days while protecting against freeze-ups under the coldest

conditions.

The other paragraphs in this section review a number of methods for

implementing both solutions.

Sealing liquid method The simplest and least costly method is to use a sealing liquid in the

transmitter meter body and its impulse piping to the process. The small

contact (interface) area between the sealing liquid and the process fluid

reduces the mixing of the two fluids.

You should select a sealing liquid that has a greater specific gravity than

the process fluid to inhibit mixing. It also must have freezing and

boiling temperatures compatible with the range of temperatures existing

at the site, including the heated interface.

WARNING WARNING — The user must verify the compatibility of any sealing

liquid with their process fluid.

A reliable sealing liquid is a 50/50 percent (by volume) solution of

ethylene-glycol and water. This solution has a specific gravity of 1.070 at

60°F (15°C), a freezing temperature of –34°F (–36°C), and a boiling

temperature of +225°F (+106°C) at atmospheric pressure. Conventional

antifreeze liquids for automobile coolant systems such as Prestone and

Continued on next page

238 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

B.1 Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued

Sealing liquid method,

continued Zerex are solutions of ethylene-glycol with some rust inhibitors and

possibly leak sealants added; they may be used in place of pure ethylene-

glycol.

Another sealing liquid, used in many chemical plants, is dibutylphalate an

oily-type liquid with a specific gravity of 1.045 at 70°F (21°C). It has a

boiling point 645°F (340°C) and does not freeze so it can be used down to

about –20°F (–30°C).

Figures B-1 and B-2 show typical piping installations for this method. The

process fluid must be heated above its freezing point. This is frequently

done by lagging in (insulating) the connecting nipple, shut-off valve and

“T” connector with the process piping. Where the process piping itself

requires heating, a steam or electric trace is run around their components

with consideration given to the boiling point of the sealing liquid.

Figure B-1 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid With Specific Gravity Heavier Than

Process Fluid.

1/2" seamless pipe nipple 6" long

1/2" shut-off valve (thru

port type desirable)

1/2" pipe cross

with 2 pipe plugs

1/2" seamless pipe

(slope at least 1"

per foot downward

1/2" 3-valve

manifold,

standard type

1/2" seamless pipe

(short as possible to

reduce head effect)

Differential

pressure

transmitter

Process pressure

transmitter

1/2" pipe union

or coupling

1/2" pipe cross

with 2 pipe plugs

1/2" shut-off valve (thru

port type desirable)

1/2" seamless pipe nipple 6" long

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 239

B.1 Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued

Sealing liquid

method, continued

Figure B-2 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid with Specific Gravity Lighter Than

Process Fluid.

1/2" seamless

pipe nipple 6" long

1/2" shut-off valve (thru

port type desirable)

1/2" seamless pipe

(short as possible to

reduce head effect)

Process pressure

transmitter

1/2" pipe union

or coupling

1/2" pipe cross

with 2 pipe plugs

1/2" shut-off

valve (thru port

type desirable)

1/2" seamless

pipe nipple 6"

long

1/2" pipe cross

with 2 pipe plugs

1/2" 3-valve

manifold,

standard type

Differential

pressure

transmitter

1/2" seamless pipe

(slope at least 1"

per foot downward

Make both HP and LP

connections as shown.

The installation should be checked every 6 to 12 months to verify that the

sealing liquid is at its required specific gravity.

Purging Purging air or water purges are commonly used to prevent viscous

materials from clogging the impulse lines to pressure, level, or flow

transmitters. The bubbler system, using a constant-air flow regulator, is

particularly common on open tank liquid level applications. No heating of

impulse lines or transmitter is required, but normal precautions are

required to keep water out of the air supply system.

Gas applications We must not overlook the possibility of condensate freezing in impulse

lines to transmitters measuring gas flow or pressure. Although these

components could be heated similar to water and steam applications, the

simplest and best approach is to install transmitters so that they are self

draining. This means that the impulse lines are connected to the lowest

Continued on next page

240 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

B.1 Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued

Gas applications,

continued point in the transmitter meter body and the piping is sloped downward at

least one inch per foot. (Side-connected transmitters with vent-drains at a

lower point in the meter body must be regularly checked to assure

condensate removal.) If the transmitter is located below the process taps

(not recommended), piping must still run downward from the transmitter

to the drain point and then up to the process as shown in Figure B-3.

Steam or electric heating of the drain point will prevent pipe rupture due

to freezing.

Figure B-3 Piping Installation for Gas Flow.

Transmitter

Mechanical

(diaphragm) seals Diaphragm seals on the impulse lines provide the most expensive, yet

broadest application of all the methods. Similar in principle to the liquid

seals, diaphragm seals eliminate the possibility of seal liquid carry-over

into the process fluid. This eliminates the need for periodic maintenance

checks to assure full and equal liquid seal legs. Welded diaphragm seals

with special fills permit temperatures from –34° to 600°F (–36° to 315°C)

at the process interface which can therefore be steam or electrically heated

to assure viscosity of tars and similar high-freezing point fluids under the

coldest conditions.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 241

B.1 Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued

Mechanical

(diaphragm) seals,

continued You must be careful to specify large enough diaphragms to accommodate

expansion and contraction of the fill fluid under varying temperatures

without overextending the diaphragm into its stiff area. In general,

conventional diaphragm seals are satisfactory for pressure ranges above

approximately 75 psig with special large diameter elements required for

low pressure or differential pressure measurements.

You can lag (insulate) impulse lines and diaphragm seals with the process

piping, but this practice is only common with liquid level applications

involving highly viscous materials unsuitable for 1/2-inch impulse lines.

Use a tank-mounted flanged seal in such installations. Otherwise, it is

more desirable to keep the capillary lengths short, the transmitter

accessible for maintenance, and (for flow applications) the normal 3-valve

manifold assembly close to the transmitter for normal service checks.

Thus, the impulse lines, valving and diaphragm seals with 1/2-inch

connections would be electrically or steam traced, with high temperature

steam permitted without damage to the transmitter. See Figures B-4 and

B-5 for typical piping layouts.

Figure B-4 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter with

Metal Diaphragm Seals.

The impulse piping, 3-valve

manifold, and upper flanges

of the metal diaphragm seals

must be insulated and, where

required, also heated by

electric or steam.

1/2" , 3-valve manifold

(standard type with

suitable temperature rating)

Differential pressure

transmitter with metal

diaphragm seals

Continued on next page

242 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

B.1 Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued

Mechanical

(diaphragm) seals,

continued

Figure B-5 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter with

Metal Diaphragm Seal.

Process pressure

transmitter with

metal diaphragm

seal

Pipe union or

coupling

Shut-off valve

Impulse piping, shut-off valve, and

diaphragm seal distance must be as

short as possible and insulated along

with the process pipe or vessel

Electric heating Most transmitters will withstand higher temperatures at their process

interfaces (bodies) than at their electronics. Normally, it is impractical to

heat transmitter bodies above 225 to 250°F (107 to 121°C) without radiant

and conducted heat exceeding the rating at the electronics (normally

200°F/93°C). Prefabricated insulated enclosures with integral heating

coils and thermostats set at 200°F (93°C) can assure viscosity of fluids

which freeze below 180°F (82°C) while assuring safe transmitter

operation. For water or similar lower-temperature mediums, the control

can be set at 50°F (10°C) to save energy and call for heat only when

temperature and wind conditions require.

Systems can be engineered for uncontrolled, continuous electric heating to

prevent water freezing at 0°F (–18°C) and 20 mph wind velocity, while

not exceeding 225°F (107°C) at the transmitter body at 90°F (32°C)

ambient and zero wind velocity. The operating costs in energy for these

systems usually exceed the high initial cost of the thermostat systems.

Never attempt to maintain freeze points above 100°F (38°C) without

thermostat controls since the Btu required to prevent freezing will

normally exceed the body temperature rating under opposite extremes.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 243

B.1 Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued

Electric heating,

continued Although systems are available with hollow bolts replacing the normal

transmitter body bolts and containing electrical heating elements and

thermostats, certain precautions are required with such arrangements.

Some transmitter meter body bolts are too small to accept the available

thermostats. Also thermostat settings should not approach the body

temperature limit because the heat gradient across the meter body can be

such that limits are exceeded adjacent to the heating elements even when

the thermostat setting is lower.

Electrical heating systems are available in explosionproof ratings for

Class I, Group D, Division I and II installations.

The possibility of electric supply failure must be considered. For this

reason, we recommend using alarm devices with manual acknowledgment

and reset.

See Figures B-6 and B-7 for typical piping installations.

Figure B-6 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and

Impulse Piping with Electric Heating and Control.

Electric heating cable

1/2" , 3-valve manifold

(standard type )

Differential pressure

transmitter

Temperature

controller

(thermostat)

Temperature

sensor

Insulated enclosure

Continued on next page

244 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

B.1 Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued

Electric heating,

continued

Figure B-7 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and

Impulse Piping with Electric Heating Control.

Union or coupling

Process pressure

transmitter

Temperature

controller

(thermostat)

Temperature

sensor

Insulated

enclosure

Shut-off valve

Shut-off valve Electric heating

cable

Steam heating Steam heating is perhaps the most common, yet potentially the most

damaging method of protecting transmitters from freeze-ups. Since steam

is generated for use in the overall process operation, it is considered an

available by-product. The most important point to remember when steam

heating transmitter meter bodies is the temperature of the steam that will

be used and its pressure. We recommend that you review the next

paragraph Superheated steam considerations to get a better understanding

of the temperature problem with steam heating. In brief, do not assume

that 30 psig steam is 274°F (134°C) and cannot damage a transmitter rated

for 250°F (121°C). With steam heating, as with electrical, you should use

insulated transmitter body housing, impulse piping and valves.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 245

B.1 Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued

Steam heating,

continued It is common practice to use conventional steam traps on all steam heating

systems. They permit live, superheated steam to enter the heating coils

and piping down to the trap. You should also use conventional steam traps

with lower pressure desuperheated steam which cannot overheat the

transmitter under warm-day conditions. If the heating pipes are not

carefully installed to eliminate low spots and trapped condensate in the

piping, they could freeze at low temperatures.

All steam traps require a periodic maintenance program. Dirt, scale, and

water softeners will cause traps to stick or jam which result in their either

blowing steam continuously or not blowing steam, allowing condensate

freeze-up in cold weather. When steam traps are used for cold-weather

freeze protection of water lines, a thermostat controlled steam supply

valve, which will shut off the steam at ambient temperatures higher than

50°F (10°C), will save steam and prevent overheating.

A more general solution is offered by a specialized type of trap which

throttles condensate flow based on its temperature. This backs up hot

water in the radiator within the insulated transmitter enclosure, assuring

temperatures no higher than the saturated steam at the reduced pressure.

Models are available to set the condensate temperature from about 70° to

200°F (21° to 93°C). They must be located within 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30

cm) of the transmitter body and , like all steam traps, they also require

periodic maintenance. The engineering of this type system is more

complex than electric systems since the amount of heat loss upstream of

the CTV valve under varying conditions will determine the location of the

steam/water interface. It could occur within the heater coil or further up

the steam line, thus affecting the heating efficiency within the insulated

enclosure. Therefore, steam control of materials which freeze or become

too viscous above 100°F (38°C) should probably not be attempted without

some experimenting with the specific piping layout used.

Uncontrolled steam heating, even with the best pressure regulation and

desuperheating of steam, should not be used to maintain transmitter

temperatures above 100°F (38°C), since this type of fixed Btu input must

either over or under-heat under normal ambient swings.

As with electric heating, there are many types of commercial steam

heating units available such as radiant heaters, hollow meter body studs or

just tubing lagged to the impulse piping and transmitter body. The same

precaution applies to the use of hollow studs as on the electrical versions.

Continued on next page

246 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

B.1 Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued

Steam heating,

continued See Figure B-8 and B-9 for typical piping installations. Table B-1

summarizes the temperature ranges for the various freeze protection

systems.

Table B-1 Temperature Range of Freeze Protection Systems

Operating

Temperature

Range

Liquid Seals

Ethylene

Glycol

Dibutyl-

Phthalate

Steam Heating

No Seals

Trap CTV

Valve

Electric Heat

Control

Thermo-

stated

ο Fο

100

200

225

325

600

106

163

315

Note: Broken lines indicate areas of caution.

Diaphragm

Seals

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 247

B.1 Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued

Steam heating,

continued

Figure B-8 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with

Steam Heating.

Steam heat

tracer line

1/2" , 3-valve manifold

(standard type )

Differential pressure

transmitter

Condensate return from steam trap. All steam and

condensate lines must always slope downward at least 1"

per foot to prevent low spots which will trap condensate.

All condensate lines must be protected from freezing.

Steam trap or

condensate

temperature

valvle

Insulated enclosure

1/4" OD steam tracer line

Impulse piping with

1/4" thick insulation

Pipe insulated with

waterproof outer cover

Pipe strap about

every 15"

Detail of Transmitter Impulse Piping

Shut-off valve

Steam Supply (low pressure)

Continued on next page

248 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

B.1 Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued

Steam heating,

continued

Figure B-9 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with

Steam Heating.

1/4" OD steam tracer line

Impulse piping with

1/4" thick insulation

Pipe insulated with

waterproof outer cover

Pipe strap about

every 15"

Detail of Transmitter Impulse Piping

Condensate return from steam trap. All steam and

condensate lines must always slope downward at least 1"

per foot to prevent low spots which will trap condensate.

All condensate lines must be protected from freezing.

Steam trap or

condensate

temperature

valvle

Insulated enclosure

Shut-off valve

Steam Supply (low pressure)

Union or coupling

Process pressure

transmitter

Shut-off valve

Steam heat

tracer line

Superheated steam

considerations We must remember that the temperature of steam is 212°F (100°C) only at

the normal atmospheric pressure of about 14.7 pounds per square inch

absolute (psia). If the pressure of steam is increased above 14.7 psia, the

temperature of the steam is also increased. For example, if we have steam

at 30 pounds per square inch gage (psig), the steam temperature is 274°F

(134°C).

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 249

B.1 Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued

Superheated steam

considerations,

continued On industrial flow and pressure measurement applications, we may be

required to use steam to heat the impulse piping to the flow or pressure

transmitter, as well as the transmitter itself. For these applications, we

must verify the temperature of the heating steam used. As an example,

assume that steam at 100 psig saturated (338°F/170°C) is to be reduced to

30 psig pressure for the heating system. Too frequently, it is assumed that

this pressure reduction will result in steam at 274°F (134°C), the

temperature of saturated steam at 30 psig. Wrong! A reduction of the

steam pressure will not appreciably decrease the initial steam temperature.

In our example, we were talking about saturated steam in the main header

from the boiler. But modern industrial boilers cannot afford to let waste

heat go up the stack. After reaching the boiling point in the drum, the

steam flows through a series of pipes in the second pass of the flue gas

exit, extracting additional heat energy and being raised to a temperature

higher than the saturation temperature at the same pressure. This is

superheat and, depending on boiler design, it may amount to 50 to 300°F

(10 to 149°C) above the saturated steam temperature. It also permits

packing more heat energy in a given size pipe for transmission from the

process. Thus, in the typical application, the problem of steam heating is

compounded by the additional superheat in the main header.

Specifically, when steam is reduced in pressure, it retains about the same

latent heat or the same Btu’s/pound at the reduced pressure. Therefore, in

our example, steam at 100 psig and 338°F (170°C) when reduced to 30

psig steam will have a temperature of 306°F (152°C) or a loss of only

32°F (18°C).

This steam temperature can only be reduced by using a desuperheater.

This device mixes cold water with the superheated steam to reduce its

temperature by removing Btu’s per pound of water (steam). It is also

possible to use temperature controlled steam traps, which actually allow

the steam to condense to water and therefore reduce its temperature to a

pre-set value.

Continued on next page

250 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

B.1 Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued

Superheated steam

considerations,

continued Table B-2 lists the various values of steam pressure, saturated steam

temperatures at these pressures, degrees of superheat added to the

saturated steam and finally the actual temperature of each when it is

reduced to 30 psig steam.

Table B-2 Steam Pressure Versus Steam Temperature Values

Pressure

(1) Saturated

Temperature

(2)

Superheat Added

(3) Final Steam

Temperature

(2) + (3)

Actual Temperature

of Steam When

Reduced From (1)*

to 30 psig

psig °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C

50 298 147 None None 298 147 290 143

100 338 170 100 55 438 225 420 215

150 366 185 120 66 486 251 460 234

200 387 198 150 83 537 281 500 260

400 448 231 200 111 648 342 600 316

600 489 254 250 139 739 393 660 349

*(1) equals pressure in column one with superheat added.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 251

Appendix C – Configuration Record Sheet

ST 3000 Smart Transmitter

Configuration Record Sheet

Series: 100 900

Type: DP GP AP RS FM

Model Number:

Range:

Tag Number:

Output Conformity: Linear Square Root

Engineering Units : "H2O_39F

mmHg_0C

PSI

KPa

MPa

mbar

bar

G/cm^2

KG/cm^2

inHg_32F mH2O_4C "H2O_68F

mmH2O_4C

Lower Range Value: 4 mAdc =

Upper Range Value: 20 mAdc =

Output Signal Mode (DE Mode Only): Single Range Dual Range (STDC)

Single Range W/SV

Message Format (DE Mode Only): W/O DB (4 Byte) W/DB (6 Byte)

Failsafe Mode STDC Card (DE Mode Only): F/S = B/O Lo

F/S = B/O Hi

F/S = LKG

F/S = FSO, B/O Lo

F/S = FSO, B/O Hi

F/S = FSO, LKG

Failsafe Direction (Analog Mode): Upscale Downscale

Write Protect Option: Read and Write Read Only

Configured By:

Date: //

Damping Time (Seconds): 0.00 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0

8.0 16.0 32.0

Mode of Operation: Analog DE

ATM "H2O_60F

252 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 253

Appendix D – Hazardous Locations Reference

Reference

Information Information is provided to clarify the hazardous location installation

requirements in North America and internationally. An explanation of

the applicable enclosure classification systems is also provided.

D.1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations

Electrical Codes Installation of electrical apparatus within hazardous (classified)

locations of the United States is conducted under the provisions of the

National Electrical Code (NEC), ANSI/NFPA 70, Article 500; and

within Canada, under the provisions of the Canadian Electrical Code

(CEC) C22.1, Part 1, Section 18.

Classes Hazardous (classified) locations, in both the United States and Canada,

are categorized into one of these three classes.

Class Description of Hazardous Location

I Presence of flammable gases or vapors may be present in

quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures.

II Presence of combustible dusts, powders or grains.

III Presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings.

Divisions The classes listed above are further categorized based upon the level of

risk present.

Division Description of Risk

1 Locations in which hazardous concentrations of flammable gases

or vapors, or combustible dust in suspension are continuously,

intermittently or periodically present under normal operating

conditions.

2 Locations in which flammable gases or vapors are present, but

normally confined within closed containers or systems from which

they can escape only under abnormal or fault conditions.

Combustible dusts are not normally in suspension nor likely to be

thrown into suspension.

Continued on next page

254 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

D.1 North American Classification of Hazardous

Locations, Continued

Examples Given the criteria above, the following examples are made:

A Class III, Division 1 location is a location in which easily ignitable

fibers or material processing combustible flyings are

handled, manufactured or used.

A Class III, Division 2 location is a location in which easily ignitable

fibers are stored or handled.

Groups Flammable gases, vapors and ignitable dusts, fibers and flyings are

classified into groups according to the energy required to ignite the most

easily-ignitable mixture within air. Group classifications are as follows:

Class I

Group Description of Atmosphere

A Atmospheres containing acetylene.

B Atmospheres containing hydrogen, fuel and combustible

process gases containing more than 30 percent hydrogen by

volume, or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard.

C Atmospheres such as ethyl ether, ethylene, or gasses or vapors

of equivalent hazard.

D Atmospheres such as acetone, ammonia, benzene, butane,

cyclopropane, ethanol, gasoline, hexane, methanol, methane,

natural gas, naphtha, propane or gases or vapors of equivalent

hazard.

Class II

Group Description

E Atmospheres containing combustible metal dusts including

aluminum, magnesium, and their commercial alloys, and other

metals of similarly hazardous characteristics.

F Atmospheres containing combustible carbonaceous dusts

including carbon black, charcoal, coal or other dusts that have

been sensitized by other materials so that they present an

explosion hazard.

G Atmospheres containing combustible dusts not included in

Group E or F, including flour wood, grain, and other dusts of

similarly hazardous characteristics.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 255

D.1 North American Classification of Hazardous

Locations, Continued

Methods of Protection The following table summarizes available methods of protection for use

in given locations.

Protection Concept Designation Permitted Use Principle

Explosionproof XP Division 1 & 2 Contains explosion and

quenches flame.

Intrinsic Safety IS Division 1 & 2 Limit energy of sparks under

normal and fault conditions.

Pressurized Type X and Y Division 1 Keeps flammable gas out.

Pressurized Type Z Division 2 Keeps flammable gas out.

Nonincendive NI Division 2 No arcs, sparks or hot surfaces

under normal conditions

Temperature

Classification Equipment intended for installation directly within the hazardous

(classified) location must also be classified for the maximum surface

temperature that can be generated under normal or fault conditions as

referenced to either 40°C (104°F) or the maximum operating ambient of

the equipment (whichever is greater). The maximum surface

temperature must be less than the minimum autoignition temperature of

the hazardous atmosphere present. The temperature shall be indicated in

identification numbers as listed in the following table.

Maximum Temperature Temperature

Degrees C Degrees F Identification Number

450 842 T1

300 572 T2

280 536 T2A

260 500 T2B

230 446 T2C

215 419 T2D

200 392 T3

180 356 T3A

165 329 T3B

160 320 T3C

135 275 T4

120 248 T4A

100 212 T5

85 185 T6

256 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

D.1 North American Classification of Hazardous

Locations, Continued

Intrinsically Safe

Apparatus

Parameters

The Apparatus Parameters are defined as follows.

Parameter Description

Vmax Maximum safe voltage that can be applied to the apparatus

terminals.

Imax Maximum safe current that can be applied to the apparatus

terminals.

Ci Unprotected capacitance in the apparatus that can be

considered present at the terminals.

Li Unprotected inductance in the apparatus that can be

considered present at the terminals.

Associated Apparatus

Parameters The Associated Apparatus Parameters are defined as follows.

Parameter Description

Voc Maximum output voltage that can be delivered to the

hazardous (classified) location. This voltage is the maximum

from a single channel.

Isc Maximum output current that can be delivered to the

hazardous (classified) location. This current is the maximum

from a single channel.

*Vt Maximum output voltage that can be delivered to the

hazardous (classified) location. This voltage is the maximum

across any combination of terminals of a multiple channel

configuration.

*It Maximum output current that can be delivered to the

hazardous (classified) location. This current is the maximum

through any combination of terminals of a multiple channel

configuration.

Ca Maximum capacitance that can be connected to the

apparatus.

La Maximum inductance that can be connected to the apparatus.

*CSA does not recognize these parameters at this time.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 257

D.1 North American Classification of Hazardous

Locations, Continued

Entity Concept Under entity requirements, the concept allows interconnection of

intrinsically safe apparatus to associated apparatus, not specifically

examined in such combination. The criteria for interconnection is that the

voltage (Vmax ) and current (Imax ), which intrinsically safe apparatus

can receive and remain intrinsically safe, considering faults, must be

equal to or greater than the voltage (Voc or Vt ) and current (Isc or It )

levels which can be delivered by the associated apparatus, considering

faults and applicable factors. In addition, the maximum unprotected

capacitance (Ci ) and inductance (Li ) of the intrinsically safe apparatus,

including interconnecting wiring, must be less than or equal to the

capacitance (Ca ) and inductance (La ) which can be safely connected to

the associated apparatus. If these criteria are met, then the combination

may be connected and remain intrinsically safe. Both FMRC and CSA

define the entity parameters in Tables D-1 and D-2.

Table D-1 Factory Mutual (FM) Entity Parameters

Code Description

1C Factory Mutual (FM) Approval

• Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C & D. Dust-

Ignitionproof for Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F & G. Suitable

for Class III, Division 1. Conduit seals required within 18” of

enclosure, Group A only.

• Intrinsically Safe for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C &

D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F & G; Class III, Division 1, T4

at 40°C, T3A at 93°C maximum ambient, when connected in

accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204241.

• Nonincendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D;

Suitable for Classes II & III, Division 2, Groups F & G, T4 at 93°C

maximum ambient, hazardous locations. 42 Vdc max.

• Environmental: Indoor & outdoor hazardous locations (NEMA 4X).

Intrinsic Safety

Entity Parameters (1) Class I, II, III, Divisions 1 and

2, Groups A - G

VMax ≤42.4 V

IMax = 225 mA

PMax = 1.2 W

Ci = 4.2 nF

Li = 0 With no integral indicator, or

with integral Smart Meter,

option SM.

Li = 150 μH With Analog Meter, option ME.

(1) Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204241.

258 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

D.1 North American Classification of Hazardous

Locations, Continued

Table D-2 CSA Entity Parameters

Code Description

2j Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

• Explosion Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C & D. Dust-

Ignition-Proof for Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F & G; Class III,

Division 1. Conduit seals not required. 42 Vdc max.

• Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Groups A, B, C & D; Class II,

Groups E, F & G; Class III, Divisions 1, T4 at 40°C, T3A at 93°C

maximum ambient. Install per Honeywell drawing 51204242.

• Suitable for Class I, II & III, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F &

G hazardous locations, T4 at 93°C. 42 Vdc max.

• Environmental: Indoor and outdoor hazardous locations

(Encl 4X).

CSA Certified Barriers (1) Class I, II, III, Division 1 and 2,

Groups

28V / 200 Ω A - G

20V / 150 Ω C - G

(1) Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204242.

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 259

D.2 International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

Classification of Hazardous Locations

About IEC The IEC has established a number of recommendations applying to the

construction of explosion protected electrical apparatus identified.

These recommendations are found within IEC 79-0 through

79-15 and 79-28.

For all EC countries as well as various neighboring countries

(CENELEC member states), the European Standards EN 50 014 to EN

50 020 and EN 50 039 apply for the construction of explosion protected

electrical apparatus. They were established on the basis of the IEC.

However these recommendations are much more detailed by

comparison.

Zones Within IEC7-10, hazardous locations are categorized into one of these

three zones.

ZONE Description of Hazardous Location

0 Explosive gas atmosphere is present continuously, or is

present for long periods.

1 Explosive gas atmosphere is likely to occur in normal operation.

2 Explosive gas atmosphere is not likely to occur in normal

operation and, if it does occur, it will exist for a short period

only.

IEC Groups Flammable gases, vapors and mists are further classified into groups

according to the energy required to ignite the most easily-ignitable

mixture within air. Apparatus is grouped according to the atmospheres

it may be used within as follows:

Group Description of Atmosphere

IIC Atmospheres containing acetylene, hydrogen, fuel and

combustible process gases or vapors of equivalent hazard.

IIB Atmospheres such as ethyl ether, ethylene, or gasses or

vapors of equivalent hazard.

IIA Atmospheres such as acetone, benzene, butane,

cyclopropane, ethanol, gasoline, hexane, methanol, methane,

natural gas, naphtha, propane or gases or vapors of

equivalent hazard.

Continued on next page

260 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

D.2 International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

Classification of Hazardous Locations, Continued

IEC Methods of

Protection The following table summarizes available methods of protection for use

in given locations.

Protection Concept Designation Permitted Use Principle

Flameproof d Zone 1 & 2 Contains explosion and

quenches flame.

Intrinsic Safety ia Zone 0, 1 & 2 Limits energy of sparks under

2 faults.

Intrinsic Safety ib Zone 1 & 2 Limits energy of sparks under

1 fault

Pressurized p Zone 1 Keeps flammable gases out.

Encapsulation m Zone 1 & 2 Keeps flammable gases out.

Increased Safety e Zone 1 & 2 No arcs, sparks or hot

surface.

Powder Filled q Zone 1 & 2 Contains explosion and

quenches flame.

Oil Immersion o Zone 1 & 2 Keeps flammable gases out.

Non-sparking nA Zone 2 No arcs, sparks or hot

surfaces under normal

conditions.

Enclosed Break nC Zone 2 Contains explosion and

quenches flame.

Limited Energy nA Zone 2 Limits energy of sparks and

surface temperature under

normal conditions.

Restricted Breathing nR Zone 2 Keeps flammable gases out.

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 261

D.2 International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

Classification of Hazardous Locations, Continued

IEC Temperature

Classification Equipment intended for installation directly within the hazardous

location must also be classified for the maximum surface temperature

that can be generated under normal or fault conditions as referenced to

the maximum operating ambient of the equipment. The maximum

surface temperature must be less than the minimum autoignition

temperature of the hazardous atmosphere present. The temperature shall

be indicated in identification numbers as listed in the following table.

Maximum Temperature Temperature

Degrees C Degrees F Identification Number

450 842 T1

300 572 T2

200 392 T3

135 275 T4

100 212 T5

85 185 T6

Certification and

Conformity Details

Table D-3 CENELEC / LCIE Certification

Code Description

3D Flameproof, Supply ≤ 45 Vdc, IP 66/67EEx d IIC T6.

3A Intrinsically Safe EEx ia IIC T5, −40 ≤ Ta ≤ 93°C.

Flameproof, Supply ≤ 45 Vdc, IP 66/67 EEx d IIC T6.

LCIE Intrinsic Safety Parameters (1)

Ui = 30 V

Ii = 100 mA

Pi = 1.2 W

Ci = 4.2 nF

Ri = 0

Li = 0 With no integral indicator, or with

integral Smart Meter, option SM.

Li = 150 μH With Analog Meter, option ME.

(1) Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204243.

262 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

D.2 International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

Classification of Hazardous Locations, Continued

Certification and

Conformity Details,

continued

Table D-4 Standards Australia (LOSC) Certification

Code Description

4H Intrinsically Safe Ex ia IIC T4 Class I Zone 0.

Flameproof Ex d IIC T6 Class I Zone 1

Non-Sparking Apparatus - Type of Protection ‘n’ Ex n IIC T6

Class I Zone 2

LOSC Intrinsic Safety Parameters (1)

Ui = 42.4 V

Ii = 225 mA

Pi = 1.2 W

Ci = 4.2 nF

Li = 0 With no integral indicator, or

with integral Smart Meter,

option SM.

Li = 150 μH With Analog Meter, option ME.

(1) Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204309.

Table D-5 Zone 2 (Europe) Declaration of Conformity

Code Description

3N Electrical Apparatus With Type of Protection “n” per IEC 79-

15. IP 66/67.

Ex II 3 GD T(1) X (Council Directive 94/9/EC) −40 ≤ Ta ≤ 93°C.

Zone 2 Parameters

Ui ≤42 V

Ii ≤22 mA

Temp. Code (1) T4 at Ta 93°C Maximum Ambient

Temp. Code (1) T5 at Ta 80°C Maximum Ambient

Temp. Code (1) T6 at Ta 65°C Maximum Ambient

Continued on next page

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 263

D.3 Enclosure Ratings

NEMA and IEC

Recognition The NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association) enclosure

classifications are recognized in the US. The IEC Publication 529

Classifications are recognized throughout Europe and those parts of the

world that use the IEC standards as a basis for product certifications.

The following paragraphs provide a discussion of the Comparison

Between NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and IEC Enclosure

Classification Designations.

IEC Classifications IEC Publication 529, Classification of Degrees of Protection Provided

by Enclosures, provides a system for specifying the enclosures of

electrical equipment on the basis of the degree of protection provided by

the enclosure. IEC 529 does not specify degrees of protection against

mechanical damage of equipment, risk of explosion, or conditions such

as moisture (produced for example by condensation), corrosive vapors,

fungus, or vermin.

NEMA Standards NEMA Standards Publication 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

(1000 Volts Maximum), does test for environmental conditions such as

corrosion, rust, icing, oil, and coolants. For this reason, and because the

tests and evaluations for other characteristics are not identical, the IEC

enclosure classification designations cannot be exactly equated with

NEMA enclosure type numbers.

IEC Designations Basically, the IEC designation consists of the letters IP followed by two

numerals. The first characteristic numeral indicates the degree of

protection provided by the enclosure with respect to persons and solid

foreign objects entering the enclosure. The second characteristic

numeral indicates the degree of protection provided by the enclosure

with respect to the harmful ingress of water.

Continued on next page

264 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 6/08

D.3 Enclosure Ratings, Continued

IEC Designations,

continued Table D-6 provides an approximate conversion from NEMA enclosure

type numbers to IEC enclosure classification designations. The NEMA

types meet or exceed the test requirements for the associated IEC

classifications; for this reason the Table cannot be used to convert

from IEC classifications to NEMA types.

Table D-6 NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and Comparable IEC

Enclosure Classification

NEMA Enclosure

Type Number IEC Enclosure

Classification Designation

1 IP 10

2 IP 11

3 IP 54

3R IP 14

3S IP 54

4 and 4X IP 56

5 IP 52

6 and 6P IP 67

12 and 12K IP 52

13 IP 54

NOTE: This comparison is based on tests specified in IEC Publication 529

Process Sealing Process Sealing for Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2 and Class

I, Zone 0, 1, and 2, Explosionproof Electrical Systems

ST 3000, Smart Pressure Transmitters

The ST 3000, Series 100, 100e, 600, and 900, Smart Pressure

Transmitters are CSA certified as “Dual Seal” devices in accordance

with ANSI/ISA–12.27.01–2003, Requirements for Process Sealing

between Electrical Systems and Flammable or Combustible Process

Fluids.

Accordingly, the ST 3000, Series 100, 100e, 600, and 900, Smart

Pressure Transmitters comply with the sealing requirements of NEC

Chapter 5. Special Occupancies, Article 500 — Hazardous (Classified)

Locations, Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2, Article 501 — Class

I Locations, Article 501-15, Sealing and Drainage, (f) Drainage, (3)

Canned Pumps, Process or Service Connections, Etc., Article 505 —

Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2 Locations, Article 505-16, Sealing and

Drainage, (E) Drainage, (3) Canned Pumps, Process, or Service

Connections, and So Forth., and the Canadian Electrical Code rules 18-

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 265

092, 18-108, 18-158, J18-108 and J18-158.

Annunciation of a primary seal failure per ANSI/ISA–12.27.01 is

electronic and is displayed in various forms based on the type of

communication used for the particular transmitter. Failure of the

primary seal is considered a Critical Failure. Based on testing

annunciation of primary seal failure will occur in 7 hours or less.

The transmitter’s 4-20 mA output will be driven to the selected failsafe

direction – upscale or downscale.

The transmitter’s digital output (DE, HART, Fieldbus) will display any

of the following responses which could indicate a primary seal failure as

well as other meter body faults.

METER BODY FAULT, MB OVERLOAD, SUSPECT INPUT,

SENSOR FAILURE, DEVICE FAILURE.

Index

Analog and DE Modes, 56

Analog meter connections, 48

Analog Mode, 2

Barrier Diaphragms

Cleaning and Inspecting, 171

Battery Pack

Installing and Charging, 22

Bracket

Mounting Transmitter, 27

Calibration

Calibrating Analog Output Signal, 185

Calibrating Range with SFC, 189

Equipment Required, 184

Resetting, 192

Typical Equipment Connections, 191

Communications

Starting, 52

Configuration Database, 61

Configuration Decisions

Summary, 67

Configuration Parameters, 64

Damping, 64

Damping Time

Adjusting, 77

Keystroke Summary, 78

DE Mode, 3

DE protocol format, 2

Diagnostic Messages, 196

Communication Errors, 200

Critical Failures, 200

Interpreting, 203

Interrupt Messages, 201

Invalid Key Entry, 201

Non-Critical Failures, 199

Diaphragm Seals, 240

Display and Keyboard Test

Running, 207

Dropout

Square Root, 76

Electric Heating, 242

EMC Directive, 18

Enclosure ratings, 264

Engineering Units

Selecting, 79

Engineering Units High and Low, 66

Environmental Conditions, 19

Failsafe Direction

Changing, 156

Flange Adapter

Installing, 42

Flange Connections

Description, 41

Flange mounted transmitter, 35

Mounting, 35

Flow Measurement (DP)

Starting Up, 129

Flush Mounted Transmitter

Mounting, 34

Freeze Protection, 237

Hazardous locations reference

IEC Classifications, 259

North American Classifications, 253

Hold Memory

SFC, 62

Lightning Protection, 46

Linear Output

Selecting, 74

Liquid Level Measurement (DP with Remote Seals)

Starting Up, 148

Liquid Level Measurement (DP)

Starting Up Pressurized Tank, 137

Starting Up Vented Tank, 134

Local Smart Meter

Set Up Summary (Using Meter Pushbuttons), 121

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 267

Local Smart Meter

Keystroke Summary (Using SFC), 103

Meter/Transmitter Interaction, 168

Options, 13

Output Conformity, 105

Pushbuttons, 104

Reference Specifications, 24

Set Up Using Meter Psuhbuttons, 104

Set Up Using SFC, 97

Setting display of LRV (using meter pushbuttons), 110

Local Smart Meter Display

Description, 164

Error Codes, 167

Typical Indications, 165

Local Zero and Span

Adjusting (Procedure), 85

Loop wiring, 48

LRV (Lower Range Value), 64

LRV and URV

Keying in Values, 81

Keystroke Summary (Applied Pressures), 84

Keystroke Summary (Keying in Values), 82

Setting to Applied Pressures, 83

Maintenance

Routine, 170

Memories

Non-volatile, 62

SFC and ST 3000, 62

Message Format

(DE Only) Selecting \i, 95

DE Mode Only, 65

Keystroke Summary, 96

Meter Body

Replacing, 178

Meter Engineering Units, 66

Mode and Software

Checking, 55

Mode of Operation

Changing, 58

Keystroke Summary, 59

Model Number

Format, 4

Mounting Area

Considerations, 19

Mounting Location

Suggested, 39

Mounting Precautions

Model STD110, 32

Models STA122 and STA922, 30

Non-volatile Memory

Copying data into non-volatile memory, 63

ST 3000, 62

Number Symbol “#”

Clearing, 197

Operation Data

Accessing, 153

Output Conformity, 64

Keystroke Summary, 75

Selecting, 74

Smart Meter setup, 98

Output Mode

Running Analog Output Check, 126

Output Signal Indication

DE Mode Only, 65

Output Signal Mode

(DE Only) Selecting, 92

Keystroke Summary, 94

Ranges, 92

Parameters

Configuration, 64

Piping, 38

Potential Noise Sources, 19

Power Supply Voltage

Operating Range, 43

Pressure Measurement (AP)

Starting Up, 146

Pressure Measurement (DP)

Starting Up, 132

Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement (GP)

Starting Up, 141, 145

Pressure Ratings, 21

Process Connections

Summary, 40

Process Sealing, 47, 264

PWA

Replacing, 175

Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter

Mounting, 36

Replacement parts, 209

Save and Restore Database, 160

Procedure, 161

Scratch Pad Area

Writing Data, 158

Sealing Liquid, 237

SFC

Connecting to Transmitter, 51

Disconnecting, 123

Display Characteristics, 71

Model Designations, 9

Purpose, 8

SM 3000 Smart Meter connections, 48

Smart Meter. See Local Smart Meter

Smartline Configuration Toolkit, 1

Solution Support Center, xiii

Square Root Output, 75

Dropout, 76

Selecting, 74

ST 3000 Smart Transmitter, 2

Startup Procedure

Reference, 125

Start-Up Tasks

Reference, 16

Status Check

Running, 202

Steam Heating, 244

Superheated Steam, 249

Tag Number, 64

Entering (Procedure), 72

Keystroke Summary, 73

Temperature Limits

Operating, 20

Transmitter mounting

Models STA122, STA922, 30

Transmitter options

Options, 233

Transmitter Types, 5

Tthree-Valve Manifold

Piping, 38

Turndown Ratio, 77

Unit of Measurement, 64

URV (Upper Range Value), 64

Vibration Sources, 19

Wiring Connections, 45

Write Protect Jumper

Location and Selections, 56

Zero and Span Adjust

Options, 13

Zero corrects, 32

Zero shift, 30

6/08 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual 269

Honeywell Process Solutions

512 Virginia Drive

Fort Washington, PA 19034

Honeywell Satellite Radio St 3000 Users Manual .

ST 3000 to the manual 8a05c09e-2577-46e3-bdc8-63caffbb8472

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation